Table of Contents
- Contents
- Safety information
- Learning about the printer
- Understanding the home screen
- Setting up and using the home screen applications
- Additional printer setup
- Installing internal options
- Installing hardware options
- Attaching cables
- Setting up the printer software
- Networking
- Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
- Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
- Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
- Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
- Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
- Setting up serial printing
- Verifying printer setup
- Loading paper and specialty media
- Paper and specialty media guidelines
- Printing
- Copying
- Making copies
- Copying film photos
- Copying on specialty media
- Customizing copy settings
- Copying in black and white
- Copying to a different size
- Making copies using paper from a selected tray
- Copying different paper sizes
- Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
- Reducing or enlarging copies
- Adjusting copy quality
- Collating copies
- Placing separator sheets between copies
- Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
- Creating a custom copy job (job build)
- Placing information on copies
- Canceling a copy job
- Understanding the copy screens and options
- E-mailing
- Faxing
- Getting the printer ready to fax
- Initial fax setup
- Choosing a fax connection
- Connecting to an analog telephone line
- Connecting to a DSL service
- Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
- Connecting to a distinctive ring service
- Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
- Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number
- Setting the date and time
- Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
- Creating shortcuts
- Sending a fax
- Customizing fax settings
- Canceling an outgoing fax
- Understanding the fax options
- Holding and forwarding faxes
- Getting the printer ready to fax
- Scanning
- Understanding the printer menus
- Saving money and the environment
- Securing the printer
- Maintaining the printer
- Managing the printer
- Clearing jams
- Troubleshooting
- Solving basic printer problems
- Understanding the printer messages
- Adjusting color
- An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive.
- Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
- Change [paper source] to [custom string]
- Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]
- Close front door
- Close top access cover
- Disk corrupted
- Disk full, scan job canceled
- Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
- Disk problem
- Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
- Fax memory full
- Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
- Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Fax Station Name not set up
- Fax Station Number not set up
- Insert Tray [x]
- Install Tray [x]
- Load [paper source] with [custom type name]
- Load [paper source] with [custom string]
- Load [paper source] with [paper size]
- Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]
- Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
- Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
- Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
- Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
- Memory full, cannot print faxes
- No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
- Paper changes needed
- Remove packaging material, [area name]
- Remove paper from standard output bin
- Replace separator pad
- Restore held jobs?
- Scanner ADF Cover Open
- Scan Document Too Long
- SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
- Some held jobs were not restored
- Supply needed to complete job
- Tray [x] paper size unsupported
- Unsupported disk
- Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator
- 31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge
- 32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device
- 34 Incorrect paper size, open [src]
- 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
- 37 Insufficient memory to collate job
- 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation
- 37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
- 37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
- 38 Memory full
- 39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
- 51 Defective flash detected
- 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
- 53 Unformatted flash detected
- 54 Network [x] software error
- 54 Serial option [x] error
- 54 Standard network software error
- 55 Unsupported option in slot [x]
- 56 Parallel port [x] disabled
- 56 Serial port [x] disabled
- 56 Standard USB port disabled
- 56 USB port [x] disabled
- 57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored
- 58 Input config error
- 58 Too many disks installed
- 58 Too many flash options installed
- 58 Too many trays attached
- 59 Incompatible tray [x]
- 61 Remove defective disk
- 62 Disk full
- 63 Unformatted disk
- 80.xx Fuser near life warning
- 80.xx Fuser life warning
- 80.xx Replace fuser
- 80.xx Fuser missing
- 82.xx Replace waste toner bottle
- 82.xx Waste toner bottle missing
- 82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full
- 83.xx Replace transfer module
- 83.xx Transfer module life warning
- 83.xx Transfer module missing
- 83.xx Transfer module near life warning
- 84.xx [color] photoconductor missing
- 84.xx [color] photoconductor nearly low
- 84.xx [Color] photoconductor low
- 84.xx Replace [color] photoconductor
- 88 Replace [color] cartridge
- 88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low
- 88.xx [color] cartridge low
- 88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low
- 88.xx [Color] cartridge very low
- 29y.xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job
- 280.06 Paper missing
- 840.01 Scanner disabled by admin
- 840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
- 1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
- Solving printing problems
- Multiple-language PDF files do not print
- Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
- Error message about reading USB drive appears
- Print jobs do not print
- Make sure there is no problem with your printer
- Make sure the printer is ready to print
- Check if a supply is missing or needs replacement
- Check if the standard exit bin is full
- Check if the paper tray is empty
- Make sure the correct printer software is installed
- Make sure the internal print server is working properly
- Make sure you are using a recommended USB, serial, or Ethernet cable
- Make sure printer cables are securely connected
- Confidential and other held jobs do not print
- Print job takes longer than expected
- Printing slows down
- Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
- Incorrect characters print
- Tray linking does not work
- Large jobs do not collate
- Unexpected page breaks occur
- Solving copy problems
- Solving scanner problems
- Solving fax problems
- Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
- Caller ID is not shown
- Cannot send or receive a fax
- Check the display for error messages
- Check the power
- Check the printer connections
- Check the telephone wall jack
- Review this digital phone service checklist
- Check for a dial tone
- Temporarily disconnect other equipment
- Check for jams
- Temporarily disable Call Waiting
- Voice Mail service may be interfering with the fax transmission
- The printer memory may be full
- Can send but not receive faxes
- Can receive but not send faxes
- Received fax has poor print quality
- Solving home screen application problems
- Solving option problems
- Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
- Paper tray problems
- 2,000-sheet drawer problems
- Memory card
- Cannot detect flash memory card
- Cannot detect printer hard disk
- Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
- Internal print server does not operate correctly
- USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
- Solving paper feed problems
- Solving print quality problems
- Characters have jagged or uneven edges
- Clipped images
- Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages
- Gray background
- Incorrect margins
- Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints
- Paper curl
- Print irregularities
- Print is too dark
- Print is too light
- Printer is printing blank pages
- Repeating defects appear on prints
- Shadow images appear on prints
- Skewed print
- Solid color pages
- Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper
- Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
- Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
- Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
- Make sure the toner cartridge is installed correctly or is not defective
- Make sure the transfer module is not worn or defective
- Make sure the photoconductor unit is not worn or defective
- Make sure the fuser is not worn or defective
- Make sure the printer has recalibrated recently
- Make sure the application has not specified an off-white background
- Make sure no toner is in the paper path
- Toner rubs off
- Toner specks
- Transparency print quality is poor
- Solving color quality problems
- Embedded Web Server does not open
- Contacting customer support
- Notices
- Product information
- Edition notice
- GOVERNMENT END USERS
- Trademarks
- Licensing notices
- Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
- Modular component notice
- Noise emission levels
- Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
- India E-Waste notice
- Product disposal
- Battery notice
- Temperature information
- Static sensitivity notice
- ENERGY STAR
- Mercury statement
- Laser notice
- Laser advisory label
- Power consumption
- European Community (EC) directives conformity
- Radio interference notice
- Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
- Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
- South Africa telecommunications notice
- Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
- Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
- Regulatory notices for wireless products
- Exposure to radio frequency radiation
- Industry Canada (Canada)
- Notice to Users in the European Union
- STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS, LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUN ...
- Patent acknowledgment
- Index
Lexmark X748dte User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for X748dte by Lexmark which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................6
Learning about the printer...........................................................................8
Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................8
Selecting a location for the printer............................................................................................................9
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................10
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass..............................................................................................12
Using the printer control panel...............................................................................................................13
Understanding the home screen................................................................15
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................15
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................17
Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................19
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................19
Showing or hiding icons on the home screen.........................................................................................19
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................20
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.........................................................................................................22
Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................22
Additional printer setup.............................................................................24
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................24
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................41
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................43
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................45
Networking..............................................................................................................................................46
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................55
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................57
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................57
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................57
Loading the standard or optional 550‑sheet tray...................................................................................57
Loading the optional 550‑sheet special media tray................................................................................61
Loading the 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder........................................................................................67
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................69
Contents 2
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................72
Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................................74
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................74
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................78
Printing......................................................................................................81
Printing forms and a document...............................................................................................................81
Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................83
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................85
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................86
Printing on specialty media.....................................................................................................................86
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................89
Copying......................................................................................................90
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................90
Copying film photos................................................................................................................................91
Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................91
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................92
Placing information on copies.................................................................................................................97
Canceling a copy job................................................................................................................................97
Understanding the copy screens and options.........................................................................................98
E-mailing..................................................................................................101
Getting ready to e-mail.........................................................................................................................101
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................102
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................103
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................104
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................104
Understanding the e-mail options........................................................................................................105
Faxing......................................................................................................108
Getting the printer ready to fax............................................................................................................108
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................114
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................114
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................116
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................118
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................118
Contents 3
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................120
Scanning...................................................................................................122
Using Scan to Network..........................................................................................................................122
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................122
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................126
Understanding the printer menus ............................................................130
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................130
Supplies menu.......................................................................................................................................131
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................132
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................140
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................141
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................154
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................160
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................208
Saving money and the environment.........................................................210
Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................210
Saving energy........................................................................................................................................211
Recycling................................................................................................................................................213
Securing the printer..................................................................................215
Locking the system board......................................................................................................................215
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................215
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................216
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................216
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................217
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................218
Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................219
Maintaining the printer............................................................................220
Cleaning the printer parts.....................................................................................................................220
Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................226
Ordering parts and supplies..................................................................................................................227
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies...........................................................................................228
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................229
Replacing parts and supplies.................................................................................................................229
Contents 4
Resetting the maintenance counter......................................................................................................241
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................241
Managing the printer...............................................................................243
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................243
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................243
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................243
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................243
Clearing jams............................................................................................245
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................245
Understanding jam numbers and locations..........................................................................................246
200–201 paper jams..............................................................................................................................247
202–203 paper jams..............................................................................................................................252
24x paper jam........................................................................................................................................258
250 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................259
29y.xx paper jams..................................................................................................................................259
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................262
Solving basic printer problems..............................................................................................................262
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................262
Solving printing problems.....................................................................................................................278
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................282
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................285
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................287
Solving home screen application problems...........................................................................................290
Solving option problems........................................................................................................................295
Solving paper feed problems.................................................................................................................298
Solving print quality problems..............................................................................................................299
Solving color quality problems..............................................................................................................312
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................315
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................315
Notices.....................................................................................................316
Index........................................................................................................332
Contents 5
Safety information
Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or other types of surge or UPS devices. The power rating capacity of these types of
accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance, property
damage, or potential fire.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The fuser and the inside of the printer near the fuser may be hot. To reduce the risk
of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before removing paper from this area.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•Use the handholds located on both sides and rear of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
•Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided
with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public
switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
Safety information 6
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the interior or exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before
proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 7
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
•Connecting the printer
•Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•Loading paper
•Configuring printer settings
•Viewing and printing documents and photos
•Setting up and using the printer software
•Configuring the printer on a network
•Caring for and maintaining the printer
•Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available at http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
•Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
•The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Learning about the printer 8
What are you looking for? Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
•Documentation
•Driver downloads
•Live chat support
•E‑mail support
•Voice support
Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
•Machine Type number
•Serial number
•Date purchased
•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
•In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
•Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
•Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
•Keep the printer:
–Clean, dry, and free of dust.
–Away from stray staples and paper clips.
–Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
–Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
•Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6-32.2°C (60-90°F)
Storage temperature -40° to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)
•Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer 9
1
2
3
4
5
1Right side 100 mm (3.9 in.)
2Front 482.6 mm (19.5 in.)
3Left side 100 mm (3.9 in.)
4Rear 100 mm (3.9 in.)
5Top 393.7 mm (15.5 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor‑mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high‑capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
You can configure your basic printer by adding up to four 550‑sheet optional drawers and a 2000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder. A caster base and a spacer are supported in any configurations.
Spacers are nonfunctional trays that can be used to add height to a printer stack. Spacers must be:
•Placed directly on a caster base or table top.
•Placed at the bottom of all tray stacks, and cannot be used with an optional 2000‑sheet high‑capacity drawer.
For information on installing the spacers, see the instruction sheet that came with the hardware.
Learning about the printer 10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
8
1Automatic document feeder
(ADF)
2ADF tray
3Standard bin
4Printer control panel
5Optional 550‑sheet drawer
Note: This drawer is
standard on the X748dte
model.
6Optional 550‑sheet drawer
7Optional 2000‑sheet high
capacity feeder
8Caster base
9Standard 550‑sheet drawer
10 Multipurpose feeder
Learning about the printer 11
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) can scan multiple pages, including duplex pages. When using the ADF:
•Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
•Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
•Scan sizes from 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
•Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
•Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:
•Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
•Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
•Copy books up to 25.4 mm (1 in.) thick.
Learning about the printer 12
Using the printer control panel
3
12
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
7
PQR
8
STU
9
WXYZ
0
9
1
4
5
6
7
8
10
2
Use the To
1Display View printing, e‑mailing, copying, and faxing options, as well as status and error messages.
2Sleep button Enable Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mode.
The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button:
•Entering or waking from Sleep mode
–The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
–The Sleep button is illuminated.
•Operating in Sleep mode
–The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
–The Sleep button is illuminated solid amber.
•Entering or waking from Hibernate mode
–The indicator light is unilluminated.
–The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0.10 of a second, then goes completely unilluminated
for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
•Operating in Hibernate mode
–The indicator light is unilluminated.
–The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0.10 of a second, then goes completely unilluminated
for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:
•Touching the screen or pressing any hard button
•Opening an input tray, cover, or door
•Loading paper into the automatic document feeder (ADF)
•Opening the scanner glass cover or lid.
•Sending a print job from the computer
•Performing a power‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch
3Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
Learning about the printer 13
Use the To
4Dial pause
button •Cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To field, a dial pause is
represented by a comma (,).
•Redial a fax number.
Notes:
•Pressing outside of the Fax menu causes an error beep.
•Pressing from the home screen redials the most recent fax number.
5Indicator
light •Off—The printer is off.
•Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
•Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
•Blinking red— Operator intervention is needed.
6Start button •Initiate the current job indicated on the display.
•Start a copy job with the default settings.
Note: Pressing the button while scanning has no effect.
7Stop button Stop all printer activity.
Note: A list of options is displayed once Stopped appears on the display.
8Home
button
Return to the home screen.
Note: Pressing the Home button from the home screen resets all workflow factory defaults.
9Back button •Delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count field. The factory default value of 1
appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing numerous times.
•Delete the right-most digit of a number entered manually in the Fax Destination List field. You
can also press to delete an entire shortcut entry. When an entire line is deleted, another
press of causes the cursor to move up one line.
•Delete the character to the left of the cursor in the E-mail Destination List field. If the character
is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.
10 USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Learning about the printer 14
Understanding the home screen
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touch To
Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
Access the printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.
•Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Status/Supplies •Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.
•Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
USB or USB Thumbdrive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.
Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
Understanding the home screen 15
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:
Touch To
Search held jobs Search on any of the following items:
•User name for held or confidential print jobs
•Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
•Profile names
•Bookmark container or print job names
•USB container or print job names for supported file types
Release Held Fax Access the list of held faxes.
Note: This button appears only when there are held faxes with a
scheduled hold time previously set.
Lock Device Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to lock the
printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and
password has been set.
Unlock Device Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to unlock
the printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is locked. The
printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while
this appears.
Cancel Jobs Open the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.
The following options are available under the Print, Fax, and Network
headings:
•Print job
•Copy job
•Fax profile
•FTP
•E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can
show only three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a
column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Change Language Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the
primary language of the printer.
Understanding the home screen 16
Features
Feature Description
Menu trail line
Sample: Menus > Settings > Copy
Settings > Number of Copies
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.
Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
Sample: 123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home
screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the
IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely
configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touch To
Copy It Submit changes made in the copy settings and start the copy job.
Right arrow Scroll to the right.
Understanding the home screen 17
Touch To
Left arrow Scroll to the left.
Home Return to the home screen.
Right increase Select a higher value.
Left decrease Select a lower value.
Exit Exit from the current screen.
Tips Open a context-sensitive help dialog.
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Accept Save a setting.
Cancel •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset Reset values on the screen.
Understanding the home screen 18
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
•Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded applications.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
The Embedded Web Server page appears.
Showing or hiding icons on the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
A list of basic printer functions appears.
3Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.
Note: Cleared check box items are hidden.
4Click Submit.
The selected icons appear on the home screen. For information about each of these icons, see “Understanding the
home screen” on page 15.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 19
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 19.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
•Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
•Other Applications—This lets you find information about the other applications.
3Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Icon Description
The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print
frequently used online forms directly from the home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.
3Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 20
Setting up Scan to Network
Icon Description
The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard‑copy document and route it to a shared network
folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.
Notes:
•The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
•The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Scan to Network.
3Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up My MFP
Icon Description
The application lets you customize your touch‑screen settings and store those preferences in a flash
drive. Each time you want to copy, fax, or scan, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer. All
your personal preferences are automatically uploaded, including job settings, home screen preferences,
and address book.
Note: The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of
the printer.
To set up My MFP, insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display to run the setup wizard.
To use My MFP, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer when you want to copy, fax, or scan.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
Understanding WS‑Scan
Icon Description
The Web Services‑Scan application lets you scan documents at the network printer, and then send the
scanned image to your computer. WS‑Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network,
but has the capability of sending the scanned image to a Windows‑based application. To learn more
about WS‑Scan, see the Microsoft documentation.
Note: The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a computer registered with the
network printer. The computer must have either Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista operating
system installed.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.
3Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC
Applet.
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import it to apply the settings to other printers.
Exporting a configuration to a file
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings or Configuration.
3Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
5Click Configure > Export.
6Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then type a unique file name or
use the default name.
Note: If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
Importing a configuration from a file
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings or Configuration.
3Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
5Click Configure > Import.
6Browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer, and then load or
preview it.
Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
•Memory cards
–Printer memory
–Flash memory
–Fonts
•Firmware cards
–Bar Code
–IPDS
–PrintCryptionTM
•Printer hard disk
•LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
–RS‑232‑C Serial ISP
–Parallel 1284‑B ISP
–MarkNetTM N8250 802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP
–MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP
–MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP
Note: An external kit is needed to support the ISP.
Accessing the system board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 24
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
1Remove the system board cover.
aTurn the screws on the cover counterclockwise to loosen them, but do not remove them.
Additional printer setup 25
bSlide the cover slightly up until each screw is in the keyhole.
cPull the cover to remove it.
2Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Additional printer setup 26
5
1
2
4
3
1Fax card connector
2Firmware and flash memory card connectors
3Printer hard disk connector
4Internal print server connector
5Memory card connector
3Reattach the system board cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Additional printer setup 27
aAlign the keyholes with the screws.
bSlide the cover down, and then turn each screw on the cover clockwise to tighten.
Additional printer setup 28
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 24.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
3Open the memory card connector latches.
Additional printer setup 29
4Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
1
2
5Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place, and then push the latches to firmly attach
the card into the connector.
1
2
2
6Reattach the system board cover.
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed,
but the connectors are interchangeable.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and
unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 30
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see“Accessing the system board” on page 24.
2Unpack the card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the system board.
12
4Push the card firmly into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to damage the connectors.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
5Reattach the system board cover.
Note: When the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options
in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available options
in the print driver” on page 45.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 31
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 24.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2Unpack the ISP kit.
2
3
4
1
1ISP solution
2Screws for the ISP solution
3Screw for the plastic bracket
4Plastic bracket
3Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned.
Additional printer setup 32
5Attach the ISP solution to the system board.
aAlign the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board.
bHold the edges of the ISP and guide it to the opening on the system board cage, and then gently allow it to rest
on the plastic tee.
cUse the provided screw to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP solution.
Additional printer setup 34
6Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the color‑coded receptacle on the system board.
7Firmly connect the ISP solution to the system board cage using the two screws.
8Reattach the system board cover.
Note: If you have removed an optional printer hard disk while installing the Internal Solutions Port, then
reinstall the printer hard disk first before reattaching the system board cover. For more information, see
“Installing a printer hard disk” on page 35.
Installing a printer hard disk
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 35
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 24.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2Unpack the printer hard disk.
3Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
aUsing a flathead screwdriver, loosen the screws.
bRemove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
cInstall the printer hard disk onto the ISP:
1Hold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly, and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk
to the holes in the ISP.
2Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.
Additional printer setup 36
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage to
the hard disk.
dInsert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board:
aHold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly, and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to
the holes in the system board. Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause
damage to the hard disk.
Additional printer setup 37
bUse the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
cInsert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 38
4Reattach the system board cover.
Additional printer setup 39
Removing a printer hard disk
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 24.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard
disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling
the cable out.
3Remove the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the system board cage.
Additional printer setup 40
4Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.
5Set the printer hard disk aside.
6Reattach the system board cover.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb), and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any optional drawers in the following order:
•Optional 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
•Optional 550-sheet drawer
•Optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer
•Printer
For information on installing an optional drawer, see the setup documentation that came with the option.
Warning—Potential Damage: The trays in the optional 550-sheet drawer and the optional 550-sheet specialty media
drawer are not interchangeable.
Additional printer setup 41
Installing optional drawers
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1Unpack the optional drawer, and then remove all packing material.
Note: Optional drawers lock together when stacked. Remove stacked drawers one at a time from the top to the
bottom.
2Place the drawer near the printer.
3Turn off the printer.
4Align the printer with the drawer, and then lower the printer into place.
Note: A caster base and up to four spacers are supported in any printer configuration. For information on
installing the caster base and spacer, see the instruction sheet that came with the option.
Additional printer setup 42
1
2
3
1Optional 550‑sheet specialty media drawer
2Optional 550‑sheet drawer
Note: This drawer is standard in the X748dte printer model.
3Optional 2000‑sheet drawer
5Turn the printer back on.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone during a lightning
storm.
Additional printer setup 43
1Open the access door by pulling it out to the right.
2Match the appropriate cable to the corresponding port.
1
2
3
4
5
1Fax port
2Telephone port
3Ethernet port
4USB printer port
5USB port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area
shown while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Additional printer setup 44
3Close the access door, and then neatly align the cable to the left.
Note: You may choose to completely remove the access door and store it.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
2Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick , or click Start and then click Run.
bType control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
Additional printer setup 45
2Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:
•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
•For earlier versions, select Properties.
3Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3Apply the changes.
Networking
Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X - RADIUS are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
•A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
•The network gateway
•The network mask
•A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
•Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
•Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
•SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
Additional printer setup 46
•Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
•Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
–WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
–WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
–802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X user name and password
•Certificates
–No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.
Notes:
–If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact
your system support person.
–To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before installing the printer on a wireless network, make sure:
•Your wireless network is set up and is working properly.
•The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
1Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Additional printer setup 47
1
2
Note: Make sure the printer and the computer are fully on and ready.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.
2Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
3Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the
following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick or click Start, and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
cPress Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
4Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.
6From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup (Recommended).
Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.
Additional printer setup 48
7Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so
you can print wirelessly.
8Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer, see the
Networking Guide.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Note: Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.
Prepare to configure the printer
1Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
1
2
2Locate the printer MAC address.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports > > Network Setup Page >
or
> Reports > Network Setup Page
bIn the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).
Note: You will need this information later.
Enter the printer information
1Access the AirPort options:
Additional printer setup 49
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
•System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
2From the Network Name pop‑up menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y’s are the last six digits of the MAC
address located on the MAC address sheet.
3Open a Web browser.
4From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.
5Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double‑click the printer name.
Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.
6From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the location of the wireless settings information.
Configure the printer for wireless access
1Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).
3Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network.
4Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network.
5Click Submit.
6Open the AirPort application on the computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
•System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
7From the Network pop‑up menu, select the name of the wireless network.
Additional printer setup 50
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in
the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
1Install a printer driver file on the computer:
aObtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
bDouble‑click the installer package for the printer.
cFollow the instructions on the computer screen.
dSelect a destination, and then click Continue.
eFrom the Easy Install screen, click Install.
fType the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary applications are installed in the computer.
gClick Close when the installation is complete.
2Add the printer:
aFor IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
•System Preferences > Print & Scan
•System Preferences > Print & Fax
2Click +.
3If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.
4Click the IP tab.
5Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.
4Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
bFor AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
•Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
•This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.
Additional printer setup 51
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3From the Printer List, click Add.
4Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
6From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers
that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access
the printer must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:
•If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
•If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes to your computer configurations.
•If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If
the printer is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network, turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on.
•Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types,
turn off the printer, connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch
to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer back on.
For Windows users
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Open the printers folder.
Additional printer setup 52
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type Run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick , or click Start and then click Run.
bIn the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
3To select the printer that has changed, do either of the following:
•Press and hold the printer, and then select Printer properties.
•Right‑click the printer, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
4Click the Ports tab.
5Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
6Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
7Click OK > Close.
For Macintosh users
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Add the printer.
•For IP printing:
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
–System Preferences > Print & Scan
–System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +.
cClick the IP tab.
dType the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
•For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
–Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
–This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5.
aFrom the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
bClick +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer > Add
Additional printer setup 53
Setting up serial printing
Use serial printing to print even when the computer is far from the printer, or to print at a reduced speed.
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer. Make sure you have
connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1Set the parameters in the printer.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
bLocate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
cSave the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.
2Install the printer driver.
aObtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer
•From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
bDouble‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If the your are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do
the following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
1Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3Press Enter, or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
cClick Install.
dFollow the instructions on the computer screen.
eSelect Advanced, and then click Continue.
fFrom the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select a port.
gIf the port is not in the list, then click Refresh, or navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK
hClick Continue > Finish.
3Set the COM port parameters.
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
aOpen Device Manager.
Additional printer setup 54
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
1Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3Press Enter, or click OK.
bDouble‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.
cDo either of the following:
•Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
•Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
dFrom the menu that appears, select Properties.
eOn the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.
fClick OK, and then close all the dialogs.
gPrint a test page to verify printer installation.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
•Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option and install it again.
•Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page
to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing
configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Additional printer setup 55
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Additional printer setup 56
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 245 and “Storing paper” on page 77.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit
Notes:
•The Paper Size setting is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the
standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and the multipurpose feeder.
•The Paper Size setting for Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually in the Paper Size menu.
•The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper.
•The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:
•Units of Measure
•Portrait Width
•Portrait Height
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height > select the width or height > Submit.
Loading the standard or optional 550‑sheet tray
The printer has one standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and may have up to four optional 550‑sheet trays including the
special media tray. For narrow paper sizes such as A6 and envelopes, use the special media tray. For more information,
see “Loading the optional 550‑sheet special media tray” on page 61.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull the tray completely out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 57
2Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the length and width guides.
Loading paper and specialty media 58
3Squeeze and slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Notes:
•For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze and slide the length guide backward to accommodate
their length.
•The length guide has a locking device. To unlock the length guide, slide to the left the button on top of the
length guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length has been selected.
3
1
2
Loading paper and specialty media 59
4Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5Load the paper stack toward the back of the tray with the recommended printable side faceup.
Notes:
•When loading preprinted letterhead for one‑sided printing, place the header faceup toward the front of the
tray.
•When loading preprinted letterhead for two‑sided printing, place the header facedown toward the rear of
the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided (Duplex) printing
LETTERHEAD
LETTERHEAD
Note: Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the left side of the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
Loading paper and specialty media 60
6Insert the tray.
7From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Loading the optional 550‑sheet special media tray
The optional 550‑sheet special media tray (Tray 2) supports narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6.
Loading paper and specialty media 61
1
2
3
4
1Primary length guide
2Length guide lock
3Secondary length guide
4Width guide
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
Notes:
•For instructions on loading paper sizes larger than A6 and envelopes, see “Loading the standard or optional
550‑sheet tray” on page 57.
•For a complete list of supported paper sizes, see the "Supported paper sizes, types, and weights" section in the
User's Guide.
Loading narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6
1Pull the tray completely out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 62
2Squeeze and slide the primary length guide toward you until it stops.
Notes:
•The length has a locking device. To unlock the length guide, slide to the left the button on top of the length
guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length has been selected.
•You can only slide the secondary length guide when the primary length guide reaches the edge of the width
guide.
1
2
3
Loading paper and specialty media 63
3Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
1
2
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the width guide.
Loading paper and specialty media 64
4Squeeze and slide the secondary length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
1
2
5Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
6Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.
Notes:
•Load envelopes with the stamp side entering the printer first.
•Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width
guide.
Loading paper and specialty media 65
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
7Insert the tray.
8From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Note: Return the secondary length guide to its original position when loading long papers such as legal, letter, and
A4. Squeeze and slide the guide until it clicks into place.
Loading paper and specialty media 66
Loading the 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull the tray out.
2Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
3Unlock the length guide.
Loading paper and specialty media 67
4Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide. Slide the guide to the correct position for the paper
size you are loading, and then lock the guide.
5Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
6Load the paper stack:
•Printable side faceup for one‑sided printing
•Printable side facedown for two‑sided printing
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
LETTERHEAD
LETTERHEAD
Loading paper and specialty media 68
•Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray may cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
7Insert the tray.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:
•100 sheets of 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb) paper
•10 envelopes
•75 transparencies
Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media while the printer prints from the multipurpose feeder or when
the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 69
LTR&LGL EXEC A5
A4B5
1
4
5
6
2
3
1Maximum paper fill indicator
2Tray release latch
3Paper release lever
4Paper size indicators
5Paper width guide
6Width guide release tab
1Press the tray release latch to the left, and then pull the multipurpose feeder down.
2Gently pull the extension out until it is fully extended.
Loading paper and specialty media 70
3Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
Paper
Envelopes
Transparencies*
* Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful
not to scratch them.
4Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
Notes:
•Make sure paper or specialty media does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
•Paper or specialty media should lie flat and fit loosely in the multipurpose feeder.
•If the paper or specialty media is pushed too far into the multipurpose feeder, then press the paper release
lever to remove it.
•Load envelopes with the flap on the right side up and the stamp edge entering the printer first.
Loading paper and specialty media 71
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the feeder based on the paper you
loaded.
Linking and unlinking trays
The printer links when the specified paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty, paper feeds
from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.
Unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper size and type settings of the tray so that they do not match the settings of any other tray, and
then click Submit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Linking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper type and size settings of the tray so that they match the settings of any other tray, and then click
Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media 72
Creating a custom name for a paper type
If the printer is on a network, then use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for
each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Navigate to:
Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name > type a name > Submit
Note: The custom name will replace Custom Type [x] under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus.
3Navigate to:
Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit
Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3Type a name for the paper type, and then click Submit.
4Select a custom type, and then verify that the correct paper type is associated with the custom name.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
Configuring a custom name
If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x]
for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom name you want to configure, select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.
Loading paper and specialty media 73
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Notes:
•Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or on the control panel.
•Flex and straighten specialty media before loading them.
•The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier
paper.
Note: Duplex is supported only for 63 g/m2–170 g/m2 (17 lb–45 lb bond) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 74
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2, grain
short is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
•Always use new, undamaged paper.
•Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
•Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
•Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
•Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 75
•Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by
the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without melting or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:
•Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
•Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
•Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
•Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
•Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
•Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
•Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
•Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)
•Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:
1Minimize paper consumption.
2Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
Paper and specialty media guidelines 76
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple part forms or documents
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found
at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label
manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity between
40 and 60%.
•Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 77
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and weights of
paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Supported paper sizes
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
550‑sheet
tray
Optional
550‑sheet
tray
Optional
2000‑sheet
high‑capacity
feeder
Multipurpose
feeder
Optional
550‑sheet
specialty
media
drawer
Manual
paper
Manual
envelope
Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in.)
2 1 1 2 1 2 X
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)
2 1 X2 2 2 X
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.13
x 5.83 in.)
XX
2 2 2 XXX
2
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)
2 1 X2 2 2 X
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
Letter
215.9 x 279.4 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
2 1 1 2 1 2 X
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
Legal
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
2 1 1 2 1 2 X
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
Executive
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
2 1 X2 2 2 X
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
Oficio (México)
215.9 x 340.4 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
2 1 X2 2 2 X 2,3 2
Folio
215.9 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
2 1 X2 2 2 X
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
1 Source supports paper size with size sensing.
2 Source supports paper size without size sensing.
3 Paper size is supported if set to US.
4 Paper size is supported if set to metric.
5 Paper size is supported if its length is between 8.27 in. (210 mm) and 14 in. (355.6 mm); and its width is between 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and 8.5 in. (215.9 mm).
6 This size setting formats the envelope for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.
7 Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard paper or specialty media sizes.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 78
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
550‑sheet
tray
Optional
550‑sheet
tray
Optional
2000‑sheet
high‑capacity
feeder
Multipurpose
feeder
Optional
550‑sheet
specialty
media
drawer
Manual
paper
Manual
envelope
Duplex ADF Scanner
glass
Statement
139.7 x 215.9 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
XXX 2 2 2 X
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
Universal7
148 x 210 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
2 1 X1 2 X5 2 2
Universal7
76.2 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in.) to
215.9 x 1219.2 mm
(8.5 x 48 in.)
XXX 2XXXXXX
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98.4 x 190.5 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
XXX 2 2 X2XXX
9 Envelope
98.4 x 226.1 mm
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)
XXX 2 2 X2XXX
Com 10 Envelope
104.8 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)
XXX 2 1 X2XXX
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)
XXX 2 1 X2XXX
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
XXX 2 1 X2XXX
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
XXX 2 2 X2XXX
Other Envelope6
85.7 x 165 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(3.375 x 6.50 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
XXX 2 2 X2XXX
1 Source supports paper size with size sensing.
2 Source supports paper size without size sensing.
3 Paper size is supported if set to US.
4 Paper size is supported if set to metric.
5 Paper size is supported if its length is between 8.27 in. (210 mm) and 14 in. (355.6 mm); and its width is between 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and 8.5 in. (215.9 mm).
6 This size setting formats the envelope for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.
7 Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard paper or specialty media sizes.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 79
Supported paper types and weights
The printer supports 60–220‑g/m2 (16–58‑lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type Standard or
optional
550‑sheet tray
Optional
550‑sheet
specialty media
drawer
Optional
2,000‑sheet
high‑capacity
feeder
Multipurpose
feeder
Manual Paper Manual
Envelope
Duplex
Paper
•Plain
•Bond
•Colored
•Letterhead
•Preprinted
•Light
•Glossy
•Heavy
•Heavy Glossy
•Recycled
X
Card stock XXX
Transparencies XXX
Labels
•Paper
•Vinyl
XXX
Envelopes X X X X
Custom Type [x]
Rough/Cotton X
Paper and specialty media guidelines 80
Printing
Printing forms and a document
Printing forms
Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed.
Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and
Favorites” on page 20.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2Apply the changes.
Printing a document
1From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2Send the print job:
For Windows users
aWith a document open, click File > Print.
bClick Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
cAdjust the settings, if necessary.
dClick OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
aCustomize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3Click OK.
bCustomize the settings in the Print dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3Click Print.
Printing in black and white
From the home screen, navigate to:
Printing 81
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only > Submit
Adjusting toner darkness
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the toner darkness setting.
4Click Submit.
Using Max Speed and Max Yield
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield
is the factory default setting.
•Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The printer
prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.
•Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color
mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.
3From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu
2From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
3Touch Submit.
Printing 82
Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer control
panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the home screen and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is installed.
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory
device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A
loss of data can occur.
Printing 83
2From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print
files from the flash drive as held jobs.
Supported flash drives and file types
Flash drive File type
•Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
•SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
Notes:
•Hi‑Speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Devices supporting only
USB low‑speed capabilities are not supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted
with New Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.JPEG or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.TIFF or .tif
•.webp
•.fls
Printing 84
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print
Print job type Description
Confidential Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer
control panel
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Verify Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is
automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.
Reserve Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held until
deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Repeat Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.
Notes:
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel. All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
2Touch Submit.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Click Print and Hold.
4Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5Click OK or Print.
Printing 85
6From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4Click OK or Print.
5From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
•Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
•Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Printing 86
•Before loading letterhead, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
•Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:
–“Loading the standard or optional 550‑sheet tray” on page 57
–“Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 69
Tips on using transparencies
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on transparencies:
•Feed transparencies from any tray or drawer, except the optional 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder.
•Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 170°C (338°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
•To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
•Before loading transparencies, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
•We recommend Lexmark part number 12A8240 for letter‑size transparencies and Lexmark part number 12A8241
for A4‑size transparencies.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use envelopes designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that
the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
•For best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes
must not exceed 70 g/m2 (20 lb bond) weight.
•Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–Have excessive curl or twist
–Are stuck together or damaged in any way
–Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
–Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
–Have an interlocking design
–Have postage stamps attached
–Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
–Have bent corners
–Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
•Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Printing 87
Tips on using labels
Notes:
•Single‑sided paper labels designed for laser/LED printers are supported for occasional use.
•It is recommended to print no more than 20 pages of paper labels a month.
•Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual‑sided labels are not supported.
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on
the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
When printing on labels:
•Use labels designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
–The labels can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Label Weight is set to
Heavy. Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer control panel Paper menu.
–Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
•Do not use labels with slick backing material.
•Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
•Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
•Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the label.
•Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
•If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge,
and use a non‑oozing adhesive.
•Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
•From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
•Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
•Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.
•Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.
•Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.
•Use grain short card stock when possible.
Printing 88
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Printing 89
Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•When loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
•Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the proper
size may result in a cropped image.
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2From the printer control panel, press to start copying.
Copying using the ADF
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2Adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
Copying 90
Copying using the scanner glass
1Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
3If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next
Page.
4Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying film photos
1Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo > > Photo/Film > > Copy It
3Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4Touch Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It.
5If there are no trays that support transparencies, then select Manual Feeder and then touch .
6Select the desired size of the transparencies, and then select a Manual Feeder type.
7Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Copying on letterhead
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 91
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to > Manual Feeder
4Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first in the multipurpose feeder.
5Select the size of the letterhead.
6Navigate to:
Continue > Letterhead > Continue > Copy It
Customizing copy settings
Copying in black and white
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Allow color copies > Off > > Submit
Copying to a different size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3On the home screen, touch Copy.
4Touch Copy from > select the size of the original document > .
5Touch Copy to > select the size of the copy > .
Note: The printer will scale the size automatically.
6Touch Copy It.
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 92
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to
4Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.
5Touch Copy It.
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > > Copy to > Auto Size Match > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > > Copy to > Letter > > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3On the home screen, touch Copy.
Copying 93
4From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button for your preferred duplexing method.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For
example, select 1‑sided to 2‑sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2‑sided copies.
5Touch , and then Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3On the home screen, touch Copy.
4From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying:
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
5Touch .
6Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying:
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Copying 94
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7Touch > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > Off > > Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to On to place the separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to Off, then the separator
sheets are added to the end of the print job.
3Select one of the following:
•Between Copies
•Between Jobs
Copying 95
•Between Pages
•Off
4Touch > Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
•The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or JIS B5.
•The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select desired output > > Copy It
Creating a custom copy job (job build)
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
•If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
•If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
•If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Options > Custom Job > On > Done > Copy It
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
Copying 96
4Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.
5If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer
4Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time.
5Touch Yes or No > > Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom or Draft.
To place a message on the copies:
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > .
4Touch Copy It.
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel Job
on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.
Copying 97
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document.
•Touch a paper size that matches the original document.
•Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width.
•Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
•Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
•If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
•If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray or multipurpose feeder.
Copies
This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed.
Copying 98
Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can
also be set for you automatically.
•When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, setting the
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information
on your copy.
•Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
•Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
•Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of
two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies
(simplex) from two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Copying 99
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Duplex—Use to specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and
how documents are bound.
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printers.
•Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before you copy the document.
•Create Booklet—Use to create a booklet. You can choose between 1‑sided and 2‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed.
•Cover Page Setup—Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Header/Footer—Use to turn on Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text, and prints them in the
specified header or footer location.
•Margin Shift—Use to increase the size of the margin of a specified distance by shifting the scanned image. This can
be useful in providing space to bind or hole-punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of
a margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
•Overlay—Use to create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word
you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a
button with an icon of that overlay will be available.
•Paper Saver—Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is
also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on
a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders
adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.
•Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets
can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.
Save As Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number.
Copying 100
E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Getting ready to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings.
3Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4Click E-mail Settings > Setup E-mail Server.
5Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6Click Submit.
Configuring e‑mail settings
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
E-mailing 101
3Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
4Click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings.
3Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
5Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
6Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2Touch .
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
E-mailing 102
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the
proper size may result to a cropped image.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient
4Enter the e‑mail address, or press and then enter the shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
Note: You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5Touch Done > Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3Press , enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
4Touch Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail >Recipient(s) > > enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts
E-mailing 103
4Touch the name of the recipients.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add, or search the address book.
5Touch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch E-mail.
4Type an e‑mail address.
5Touch Options > Subject.
6Type the e-mail subject.
7Touch Done > Message.
8Type an e-mail message.
9Touch Done > E-mail It.
Changing the output file type
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > Done > Send as
3Select the file type you want to send.
Note: If you select Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
4Touch > Send It.
Canceling an e-mail
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
E-mailing 104
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipients
This option lets you enter the destination of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.
•Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e‑mail screen appears with the new
setting displayed.
•When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.
Color
This option sets the output color for the scanned image. Touch to enable or disable color.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
E-mailing 105
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages. This can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
•TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
•XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
•RTF—Use this to create a file in editable format.
•TXT—Use this to create an ASCII text file with no formatting.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
•Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
•Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the
orientation.
•Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
E-mailing 106
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
e‑mail the document.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
E-mailing 107
Faxing
Note: The fax function is available only in some printer models.
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Getting the printer ready to fax
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Notes:
•The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.
•During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later,
and then touch Continue.
•The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Faxing 108
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other
entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business,
other entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start‑up
screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number
1When Fax Name or Station Name appears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
2After entering the Fax Name or Station Name, touch Submit.
3When Fax Number or Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number.
4After entering the Fax Number or Station Number, touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Notes:
•The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the telephone wall outlet. Other
devices(such as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as
described in the setup steps.
•If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, then a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is
required. Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone
line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.
Faxing 109
•You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line
to send and receive faxes.
Equipment and service options Fax connection setup
Connect directly to the telephone line. See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on page 110.
Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service. See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 110.
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated
Services Digital Network (ISDN) system.
See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 111.
Use a Distinctive Ring service. See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 111.
Connect through an adapter used in your area. See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region” on
page 112.
Connecting to an analog telephone line
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US‑style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the
equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
Connecting to a DSL service
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.
Faxing 110
3Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.
3
1
2
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.
Notes:
•Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.
•Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.
•When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.
•When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.
•For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX
system.
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple
telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be
useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these
steps to connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
Faxing 111
3Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer:
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Settings > Distinctive Rings
bSelect the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone
wall jack:
Country/Region
•Austria
•Cyprus
•Denmark
•Finland
•France
•Germany
•Ireland
•Italy
•New Zealand
•Netherlands
•Norway
•Portugal
•Sweden
•Switzerland
•United Kingdom
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering
machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone
wall jack.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your
location.
Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Faxing 112
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may
have to reset the date and time.
1Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Set Date and Time.
3Click the Automatically Observe DST check box.
4In the Custom Time Zone Setup section, set the DST start and end dates.
5Click Submit.
Faxing 113
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send
a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single
fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
2Touch .
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Faxing 114
3From the home screen, touch Fax.
4Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press . The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to”
field. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
5Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option lets you send a print job to the printer, which sends the job as a fax. The fax option works
as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax
4Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature
5If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.
8Click OK.
Notes:
•The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.
•The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.
•If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.
Faxing 115
Sending a fax using shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–99999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3Press , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >
3Touch Browse shortcuts or, using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax
number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.
4Touch the name of the person you want to send the fax to, and then touch Done > Fax It.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Super Fine (slowest speed but best quality).
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
Faxing 116
4From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.
5Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.
5Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Advanced Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission
are listed in the Fax Queue.
4Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is
unavailable.
5Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Viewing a fax log
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Reports > Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Faxing 117
Blocking junk faxes
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
•This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
•In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to
block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Understanding the fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
Faxing 118
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, then increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.
•Standard—Suitable for most documents
•Fine 200 dpi—Recommended for documents with small print
•Super fine 300 dpi—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
•Ultra fine 600 dpi—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos
Note: Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.
Color
This option enables or disables color in faxing.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding settings.
•Sides (Duplex)—Use to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
•Orientation—Use to specify the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match
the orientation.
•Binding—Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Faxing 119
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Delayed Send
This lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
1Set up your fax.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Delayed Send > enter the date and time you want to send your fax > Done
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, then the fax is sent the next time the
printer is turned on.
This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain
hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Contrast, Color Balance, Negative Image, Mirror Image,
Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the document.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
•Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
Faxing 120
3From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
•Off
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled
4If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
aClick Fax Holding Schedule.
bFrom the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
cFrom the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
dFrom the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:
•Print
•Print and Forward
•Forward
4From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
•Fax
•E‑mail
•FTP
•LDSS
•eSF
5In the Forward to Shortcut field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6Click Submit.
Faxing 121
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 21.
Scanning to an FTP address
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
used at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of typing the entire FTP site address on the control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP
server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Scanning 122
2Click Settings.
3Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
4Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5Enter the appropriate information.
6Enter a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > type the FTP address > > enter a name for the shortcut > Done
2Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then
touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
3Touch Submit.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Send It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3Press , and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4Touch Send It.
Scanning 123
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > > enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts > name of recipient > Search
Using the FTP options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: Addresses should be in dot notation form (for example: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy).
File Name
This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending.
•Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with the new setting
displayed.
•When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
•When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages. The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
•TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
•XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
•RTF—Use to create a file in editable format.
•TXT—Use to create ASCII text file with no formatting.
Scanning 124
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
•Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned.
•Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides and Binding settings
to match the orientation.
•Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Scanning 125
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Negative Image, Mirror Image, Scan edge to edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature image output
settings before sending the image.
•Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
•Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive Scan-to-PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over
the network by creating a scan profile from the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Scan Profile > Create.
3Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
Scanning 126
5Enter a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6Click Submit.
7Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.
aLoad an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
bIf you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
cPress , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and
then touch Profiles.
dAfter entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.
8Return to the computer to view the file.
The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning to a flash drive
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
The USB Drive home screen appears.
4Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
5Adjust the scan settings.
6Touch Scan It.
Using the ScanBack Utility
You can use the Lexmark ScanBackTM Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan‑to‑PC profiles. The
ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark Web site home page on http:\\support.lexmark.com.
1Set up your scan‑to‑PC profile:
aLaunch the ScanBack Utility.
bSelect the printer.
If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP
address or host name.
cFollow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind
of output you want to create.
Scanning 127
dSelect any of the following:
•Show MFP Instructions—View or print the instructions.
•Create Shortcut—Save this group of settings to use again.
eClick Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.
2Scan your original documents:
aLoad all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
bFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
Scan/Email > Profiles > select your scan profile > Submit
Note: Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.
Using the scan profile options
Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan
an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
•Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
•Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
•Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
•Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Scanning 128
•Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
•Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
•Sides (Duplex)— Use this to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on
both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
•Orientation— Use this to specify the orientation of the original document, and then change Sides and Binding to
match the orientation.
•Binding— Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge of the page.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
•Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before scanning a document.
•Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job.
•Edge Erase—Use to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image.
•Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Scanning 129
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Supplies Paper Menu Reports Settings
Replace Supply
Cyan Cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Separator Roll and Pick Assembly
Waste Toner Bottle
Fuser
Transfer Module
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
OCR Settings
Print Settings
Security Network/Ports Help Manage Shortcuts
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Erase Temporary Data Files
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Active NIC
Network1
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E-mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
Option Card Menu
A list of installed DLEs (Download Emulators) appears.2
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 130
Supplies menu
Use To
Replace Supply
All Photoconductors
Cyan Photoconductor
Magenta Photoconductor
Yellow Photoconductor
Black PC Unit
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller
Provide the option to reset the supply counter for the
supplies.
•Select Yes to reset the supply counter.
•Select No to exit.
Note: Reset the supply counter manually after replacing a
photoconductor.
Cyan Cartridge View the status of the cartridges, which can be any of the
following:
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller
OK
Replace
View the status of the separator pick assembly and roller.
Waste Toner Bottle
Near Full
Replace
Missing
OK
View the status of the waste toner bottle.
Fuser
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
View the status of the fuser.
Transfer Module
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
View the status of the transfer module.
Understanding the printer menus 131
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Universal
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•The factory default setting depends on the value of Paper Sizes in the
General Settings menu.
•For trays with automatic paper size sensing, only the size detected by
the tray appears.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
•If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
•Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 132
Use To
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
•Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 133
Use To
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Roug/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper being manually loaded.
Note: Plain paper is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the size of the envelope being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of envelope being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 134
Configure MP menu
Use To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
•Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
•First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:
•All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
•Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
•Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Weight menu
Use To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 135
Use To
Glossy Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the heavy glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded.
Understanding the printer menus 136
Use To
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Card Stock as the paper type.
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.
Glossy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Glossy as the paper type.
Heavy Glossy Loading
Off
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy Glossy as the paper type.
Labels Loading
Off
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Labels as the paper type.
Vinyl Labels Loading
Off
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Vinyl Labels as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the
Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.
•If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided print jobs.
Understanding the printer menus 137
Use To
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.
Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Rough or Cotton as the paper type.
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom paper type
is supported.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the
Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.
•If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided print jobs.
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a user‑defined custom name
created in the Embedded Web Server or in MarkVisionTM Professional.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Understanding the printer menus 138
Use To
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
Height
Orientation
2 scans per side
Off
On
Specify a custom scan size name, size, and page orientation.
Notes:
•8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting for Width.
•14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting for Height.
•Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
•Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x]
[none]
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Specify the unit of measure.
Note: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the
international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–48 inches
76–1219 mm
Set the width for a portrait page orientation.
Notes:
•8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting.
•If the specified width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses
the maximum width allowed.
•The width can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.
Understanding the printer menus 139
Use To
Portrait Height
3–48 inches
76–1219 mm
Set the height for a portrait page orientation.
Notes:
•14 inches is the US factory default setting. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting.
•If the specified height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses
the maximum height allowed.
•The height can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction.
Notes:
•Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge appears only when the paper or specialty media can be
loaded in either direction.
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other
information.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details
about printed pages.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address.
Note: This menu item appears only when there is more than one network
option installed and only in network printers or printers connected to print
servers.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Understanding the printer menus 140
Use To
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or in
printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
•Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed
correctly and working.
Asset Report Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned
into an asset database.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of network cards]
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menus
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding the printer menus 141
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The value can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Understanding the printer menus 142
Use To
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Display and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
•Network/Ports menu > Networks/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
•Network/Ports menu > Networks/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
•Network/Ports menu > Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
•Network/Ports menu > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the network card.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active network card.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Job Timeout
0, 10–255 seconds
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
•90 seconds is the factory default setting.
•A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
•If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 143
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP hostname.
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Yes
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Send files to the printer using the built‑in FTP server.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server) which lets you monitor and
manage the printer remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address [x] View or change the current DNS server address.
Understanding the printer menus 144
Use To
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
•Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >IPv6
•Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wireless network.
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >Wireless
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access
point (wireless router) within a given period of time.
•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network by
using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings
of the access point.
Understanding the printer menus 145
Use To
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
•Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless
connection directly between the printer and a computer.
•Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access
point.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wired network or when an optional network card
is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
•Network/Ports > Network Setup [x] > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate
Yes
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The factory default setting is the default zone for the network. If no
default zone exists, then the zone marked with an asterisk (*) is the default
setting.
Understanding the printer menus 146
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
•The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 147
Use To
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Understanding the printer menus 148
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the parallel input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status
On
Off
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Understanding the printer menus 149
Use To
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
•Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
•Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
Off
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 150
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
•When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.
•When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the serial input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
•The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 151
Use To
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.
•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
•DTR is the factory default setting.
•DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
On
Off
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Notes:
•9600 is the factory default setting.
•138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
7
8
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 152
Use To
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Honor DSR
On
Off
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•Negotiate lets the SMTP server determine if SSL is used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for “scan to e‑mail”
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
User‑Initiated E‑mail.
•Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Use To
Edit Backup Password Create a backup password.
Note: This menu item appears only when a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks Edit the internal accounts, NTLM, various setups, password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates Add or edit a security template.
Edit Access Controls Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
•“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1–10 attempts. 3 attempts is the factory
default setting.
•“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
•“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory
default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
•“Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home
screen before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1–900
seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•“Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1–120 minutes.
10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults
Adjust the security settings.
Notes:
•“Access controls=’No Security’” retains all the security information that the
user has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.
•“No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the printer security
configuration.
•“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous
Security menu.
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:
•“Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated
immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.
•“Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.
•“Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored and the session proceeds normally.
•“Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
•This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
•Once the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted.
Notes:
•If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print
jobs does not change to the new default value.
•If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file
system. All permanent data on the hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Use To
Wiping Mode
Off
Auto
Manual
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass
Specify a method for automatic disk wiping.
Notes:
•Single pass is the factory default setting.
•Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass
method.
Manual Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass
Specify a method for manual disk wiping.
Note: Single pass is the factory default setting.
Scheduled Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass
Specify a method for a scheduled disk wiping.
Note: Single pass is the factory default setting.
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the security log.
Notes:
•To export the log from the printer control panel, attach a flash drive to the printer.
•To export the log from the Embedded Web Server, download the log to a computer.
Delete Log
Yes
No
Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Use To
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
Yes
No
Remote Syslog Server
[256 character string]
Remote Syslog Port
1–65535
Remote Syslog Method
Normal UDP
Stunnel
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Log full behavior
Wrap over oldest entries
E‑mail log then delete all entries
Admin’s e-mail address
[256 character string]
Digitally sign exports
Off
On
Severity of events to log
0–7
Remote Syslog non-logged events
No
Yes
E-mail log cleared alert
No
Yes
E-mail log wrapped alert
No
Yes
E-mail % full alert
No
Yes
% full alert level
1–99
E-mail log exported alert
No
Yes
E-mail log settings changed alert
No
Yes
Log line endings
LF (\n)
CR (\r)
CRLF (\r\n)
Specify whether and how the audit logs are created.
Notes:
•“Enable Audit” determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. No is the
factory default setting.
•“Enable Remote Syslog” determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the factory default
setting.
•“Remote Syslog Server” determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the
factory default setting.
•“Remote Syslog Port” identifies the port over which the printer transmits logged events to a remote
server.
•“Remote Syslog Method” identifies the protocol used by the printer to transmit logged events to a
remote server. Normal UDP is the factory default setting.
•“Remote Syslog Facility” determines the Facility value that the printer uses when sending events to
the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
•“Log full behavior” determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely fills its allotted memory.
“Wrap over oldest entries” is the factory default setting.
•The value of the “Admin’s e‑mail address setting can be a single e‑mail address or a comma‑delimited
list of e‑mail addresses.
•“Digitally sign exports” determines if the printer automatically signs each exported security log. Off is
the factory default setting.
•“Severity of events to log” records the severity value of each event. 4 is the factory default setting.
•“Remote Syslog non-logged events” determines if the printer sends events to the remote server that
have a severity level greater than the value of the “Severity of events to log” setting. No is the factory
default setting.
•“E-mail log cleared alert” determines if the printer sends an e‑mail to the administrator every time a
log is deleted via printer control panel or EWS. No is the factory default setting.
•“E-mail log wrapped alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator an e‑mail when log
entries are wrapping. No is the factory default setting.
•“% full alert level” determines if the space occupied by log equals or exceeds the value of the full alert
level. 90 is the factory default setting.
•“E-mail % full alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator an e‑mail when the log fills a
certain amount of its allotted space. No is the factory default setting.
•“E-mail log exported alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator an e‑mail when there is a
log exported. No is the factory default setting.
•“E-mail log settings changed alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator an e‑mail when
the value of the Enable Audit Log setting is toggled.
Understanding the printer menus 158
Set Date and Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time Enter the date and time.
Notes:
•Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
•Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.
Time Zone Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically Observe DST
On
Off
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup
UTC Offset
DST Start Week
DST Start DayOff
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset
Select the time zone.
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enable or disable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of printers
on a network.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
NTP Server View the NTP server address.
Enable Authentication
Off
On
Change the authentication setting to On or Off.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•If the authentication setting is enabled, then the printer will ask for the user
credentials, such as user ID and password.
Understanding the printer menus 159
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portugues
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text appearing on the display.
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Note: Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to
its factory default settings.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Minimize the printer noise.
Note: Off is the factory default setting. This supports the
performance specifications for the printer.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Run the setup wizard.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Use To
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portugues
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Turkce
Korean
Custom Key [x]
Accents/Symbols Tab
On
Off
Russian/Polish Tab
On
Off
Korean Tab
On
Off
Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and
symbols from the keyboard.
Paper Sizes
U.S.
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Notes:
•U.S. is the factory default setting. Metric is the international
factory setting.
•Initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Use To
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
[text entry]
Specify what is displayed on the upper corners of the home screen.
For Left side and Right side, select from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Cartridge Level
Custom Text [x]
Notes:
•IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
[x] Cartridge
[x] Photoconductor
Fuser
Transfer Module
Customize the display information for the supplies.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for Display When Supply
Registers.
•Default is the factory default setting for Message to display.
Understanding the printer menus 162
Use To
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the display information for certain menus.
Select from the following options:
Activate
Yes
No
Type of Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
[text entry]
Alternate Message
[text entry]
Notes:
•No is the factory default setting for Activate.
•Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by User
Forms and Favorites
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do Not Display
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the date.
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the time.
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the display.
Understanding the printer menus 163
Use To
One Page Copy
On
Off
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Output Lighting
Standard Bin LED
Normal/Standby Mode
Bright
Dim
Off
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
Off
Set the output lighting for the standard bin.
Notes:
•Bright is the factory default setting in Normal/Standby
Mode.
•Dim is the factory default setting in Power Saver.
•This menu item appears only when an integrated output
light is present or when an optional output bin with an
indicator light is installed.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10
Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
•5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Show Bookmarks
On
Off
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Specify whether image background removal is allowed.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.
Notes:
•Job level is the factory default setting.
•If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned
if any pages jam.
•If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name.
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Use To
Location Specify the location.
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Set an alarm when the printer requires operator intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
•Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single
sounds three quick beeps.
•Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. Off
means no alarm will sound.
•Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
1–180
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits after a job is
printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Notes:
•20 is the factory default setting.
•Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
•Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.
•Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
20 seconds
1–3 hours
6 hours
1–3 days
1–2 weeks
1 month
Set the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the control panel to a Ready state.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Use To
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print
job.
Notes:
•90 is the factory default setting.
•When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
•Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job.
Notes:
•40 is the factory default setting.
•Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL
emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
•30 is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Print Recovery
Disabled
Auto Continue
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
Auto
On
Off
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
•
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
Successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
•On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Use To
Press Sleep Button
Sleep
Hibernate
Do Nothing
Determine how the printer, when in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Notes:
•Sleep is the factory default setting.
•Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the
control panel to exit Sleep or Hibernate mode.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, when in idle state, reacts to a long press
of the Sleep button.
Notes:
•Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
•Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the
control panel to exit Sleep or Hibernate mode.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Use the printer factory default settings.
Note: Do Not Restore is the factory default setting.
Copy Settings menu
Use To
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specify whether copies are printed in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow color copies
On
Off
Enable or disable color in copying.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Off hides all color‑specific menus.
•This setting overrides the Color setting.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Use To
Auto Color Detect
Color Sensitivity
1–9
Area Sensitivity
1–9
Set the amount of color the printer can detect from the original document.
Note: This menu item is applicable only when Color is set to Auto.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided or one‑sided, and then to specify
whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
Note: 1 sided to 1 sided is the factory default setting. This setting is selected when
using a one-sided original document for a one-sided copy job.
Paper Saver
Off
2 on 1 Portrait
2 on 1 Landscape
4 on 1 Portrait
4 on 1 Landscape
Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Specify whether a border is printed.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Collate
Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5
4 x 6
ID Card
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Use To
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies
1–999
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Specify header or footer information and its location on the page.
For the location, select from the following options:
•Top left
•Top middle
•Top right
•Bottom left
•Bottom middle
•Bottom right
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for the location.
•All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.
Understanding the printer menus 169
Use To
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
Off
On
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Center
Off
On
Automatically align the content at the center of the page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast used for the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 170
Use To
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Sample Copy
Off
On
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Use To
Restore Factory Defaults Restore the factory defaults of all fax settings.
Optimize Fax Compatibility Optimize fax compatibility with other fax machines.
Station Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Station Number Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.
Station ID
Station Name
Station Number
Specify how the fax is identified.
Note: Station Number is the factory default setting.
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
•Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
Note: Equal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 171
Use To
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specify whether canceling of fax jobs is allowed.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask setting.
Digits to Mask
0–58
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]
Configure the fax cover page.
Notes:
•Off by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
•Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Fax Send Settings
Use To
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 172
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two-sided
scanning.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 173
Use To
Redial frequency
1–200
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX
Yes
No
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to fax
Yes
No
Allow the print driver to send fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specify the dialing sound.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Show whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Understanding the printer menus 174
Use To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Enable color faxing.
Note: Off by default is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono
Faxes
On
Off
Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 175
Fax Receive Settings
Use To
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Caller ID
On
Off
Display the caller ID information of an incoming fax.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
On
Enable two‑sided printing for incoming fax jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Footer
On
Off
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Footer Time Stamp
Print Time
Receive Time
Print the time when the fax was received.
Note: Receive Time is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 176
Use To
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.
Notes:
•Fax is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is available only from the Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
Off
On
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID
specified.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable the printer to hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held
faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off
Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Log Settings
Use To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enable printing of a receive error log.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 177
Use To
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax
name returned.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Speaker Settings
Use To
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Note: On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
fax connection is made.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Set the speaker volume to high or low.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer Volume
Off
On
Enable or disable the ringer volume.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Use To
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 178
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
To access the menu from the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Server Setup
Use To
To Format Specify the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer control panel.
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup Specify the SMTP setup information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify the SMTP server port information.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Specify the image type for scan‑to‑fax jobs.
Content Type
Text
Text/Photo
Graphics
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify the resolution level for scan to fax.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Understanding the printer menus 179
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the paper size of the document that is being scanned.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog Receive
Off
On
Enable analog fax receive.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name
Specify e‑mail server information.
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 180
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size.
Note: E-mails bigger than the specified maximum size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.
Notes:
•E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
•The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
Define the e‑mail server Web link settings.
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
•1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
•Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu item
appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
•Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF. Secure
PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Understanding the printer menus 181
Use To
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
Off
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 182
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the orientation of the original document loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specify how the images are sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 183
Use To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Understanding the printer menus 184
Use To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On
Enable the use of the cc: and bcc: fields.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 185
FTP Settings menu
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
•1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
•Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu item
appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
•Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF. Secure
PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
Off
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 186
Use To
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Notes:
•Best for content is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 187
Use To
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
FTP bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan‑Red
Magenta‑Green
Yellow‑Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Understanding the printer menus 188
Use To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of the scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output
than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 189
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
•1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
•Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression.
•Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF. Secure
PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 190
Use To
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
•Best for content is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 191
Use To
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Scan Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Understanding the printer menus 192
Use To
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Color
Color
Black only
Specify whether to print the document in color.
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Collate
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]
Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Enable two‑sided printing for incoming print jobs.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 193
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for two-sided pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long edge of the
page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple-page images on one side of the paper.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or in
landscape orientation.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to insert blank pages in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 194
OCR Settings menu
Use To
Auto Rotate
On
Off
Automatically rotate scanned documents for proper orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Despeckle
Off
On
Remove specks from a scanned image.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Inverse Detection
On
Off
Recognize and make the white text on a black background editable.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Contrast Enhance
Off
On
Automatically adjust the contrast to improve OCR quality.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Recognized Languages
English
French
German
Spanish
Italian
Portugues
Danish
Dutch
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Hungarian
Polish
Set the language or languages that the OCR can recognize.
For each language, select from the following options:
Off
On
Note: The language is enabled by default. If it is set to a value that is not in the list
of recognized languages, English is enabled by default.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PS Emulation
PCL Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
•PS Emulation is the factory default printer language. PS
emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs.
•PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print
jobs.
•Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Understanding the printer menus 195
Use To
Job Waiting
On
Off
Specify if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. These print
jobs are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print
normally. When the missing information or options are obtained,
the stored jobs print.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a non-read‑only printer
hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored
jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
•Whole Page allows images to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary. This
setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.
This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL
or PostScript interpreter.
Printer Usage
Max Yield
Max Speed
Set the printer for a faster print speed or a higher toner yield.
Note: Max Yield is the factory default setting.
Black Only Mode
On
Off
Set the printer to print text and graphics using only the black toner
cartridge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
•RAM is the factory default setting. Downloads stored in RAM
are temporary.
•Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.
•This menu item appears only when a flash or printer hard
disk is installed.
•The menu setting reverts to its factory default value after
each power‑on reset (POR).
Understanding the printer menus 196
Use To
Resource Save
On
Off
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
print job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.
•On sets the printer to retain downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of
memory, 38 Memory Full appears, but downloads are
not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All Order is selected.
Notes:
•Alphabetical is the factory default setting.
•Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer
control panel.
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
•1 sided is the factory default setting.
•When two-sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both
sides, the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation.
•When two-sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both
sides, the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation.
•You can set two‑sided printing in the software program. For Windows users,
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
print dialog and pop‑up menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to paper orientation.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long Edge assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 197
Use To
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On stacks the print job in sequence.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page
2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of page images that prints per side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Understanding the printer menus 198
Use To
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Use To
Print Mode
Color
Black Only
Specify whether to print images in color.
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Color Correction
Auto
Off
Manual
Adjust the color output on the printed page.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Print Resolution
1200 dpi
4800 CQ
Specify the output resolution in dots per inch (dpi) or in color quality (CQ).
Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–5
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color Saver
On
Off
Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On overrides the Toner Darkness setting.
RGB Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the brightness of the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Saturation
0–5
Adjust saturation in color outputs.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 199
Use To
Color Balance
Cyan
‑5 to 5
Magenta
‑5 to 5
Yellow
‑5 to 5
Black
‑5 to 5
Reset Defaults
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Samples
sRGB Display
sRGB Vivid
Display—True Black
Vivid
Off—RGB
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off—CMYK
Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the
printer.
Manual Color
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics
Customize the RGB color conversions.
Select from the following options:
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display—True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
Notes:
•sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image.
•sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics.
Manual Color (continued)
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
Customize the CMYK color conversions.
Select from the following options:
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
Note: US CMYK is the U.S. factory default setting. Euro CMYK is the international
factory default setting.
Color Adjust Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and allow the printer to make
adjustments for color variations in output.
Spot Color Replacement Assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 200
Use To
RGB Replacement Match the colors of the output with that of the original document.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the
printer hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Use To
Job Accounting Log
Off
On
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Monthly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Level
Off
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Understanding the printer menus 201
Use To
Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.
•Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
•Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
•No cancels the format request.
•Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
•The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
•This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Understanding the printer menus 202
Use To
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Notes:
•Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
•Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
•When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
•To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
Off
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 203
Use To
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off
Enable users to disable the SysStart file.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, non‑defective flash
memory option card or printer hard disk is installed.
•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Image Smoothing
On
Off
Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and smoothen
their color transitions.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in
resolution.
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu.
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of
fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make sure
the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write‑, or
password‑protected.
•Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
•10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
•A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
Understanding the printer menus 204
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
•12 is the factory default setting.
•Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 of an inch. This can be increased or decreased
in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100.00
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
•10 is the factory default setting.
•Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi). This
can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
•For non‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page.
Notes:
•Portrait is the factory default setting. It prints text and graphics parallel to
the short edge of the page.
•Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
•60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the paper size
and orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
•198 mm is the factory default setting.
•The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 205
Use To
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Envelope
Off
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection appears
only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.
•0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Return all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Understanding the printer menus 206
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
•12 pt is the factory default setting.
•Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
•100% is the factory default setting.
•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 207
Use To
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
•19 mm is the factory default setting.
•Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
Off
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.
Invert
On
Off
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
•Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer.
Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Understanding the printer menus 208
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 209
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode” on
page 211.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 76.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports two‑sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of
the paper.
Notes:
•Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
•For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
setting multiple page printing (N‑Up) for the print job.
Saving money and the environment 210
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
•Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.
•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 245.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use To
Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
•Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper •Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
•Turn off print log features.
3Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Saving money and the environment 211
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
•Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document is
ready to print. There will be a short delay before the
first page is printed.
•If your printer has faxing capability, then fax sounds are
reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax
speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.
•The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are
turned off.
•The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.
Off
Note: Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable
Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full
speed printing.
Use factory default settings. This setting supports the
performance specifications of the printer.
3Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power saving mode.
Notes:
•Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
•Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long press of
the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.
3Touch Hibernate > .
Saving money and the environment 212
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading from the display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•The IP address is located on the upper portion of the home screen. It appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Select Settings > General Settings.
3In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4Apply the changes.
Using the control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
3Apply the changes.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 55.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 216.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Saving money and the environment 213
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Saving money and the environment 214
Securing the printer
Locking the system board
To limit access to the system board, attach a security lock to the printer in the location identified in the illustration. The
printer is compatible with most laptop computer security locks.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Types of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy
jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Securing the printer 215
Types of memory Description
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex scan, print,
copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
•The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
•Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
•Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
Securing the printer 216
3Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
•Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
•Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left
by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe Disk appears, and then select one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Press the up or down arrow button until Yes appears, and then proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
•Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5Navigate to:
Back > Exit Config Menu
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 217
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable the hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or
Fax.
3Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 218
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.
2Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide.
Securing the printer 219
Maintaining the printer
Cleaning the printer parts
Cleaning the interior of the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the interior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around and from inside the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4Use a dry cloth to wipe away loose toner particles.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor unit or imaging unit, do not the leave the
door open for more than 10 minutes.
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2Remove all paper from the printer.
3Dampen a clean, lint‑free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4Wipe only the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before beginning a new print job.
Maintaining the printer 220
Cleaning the scanner glass
Make sure you clean the ADF glass. A small speck of dirt on the ADF glass can cause a streak that goes down the entire
length of the scanned page.
1Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2Open the scanner cover.
1
2
3
4
1White underside of the ADF cover
2White underside of the scanner cover
3Scanner glass
4ADF glass
3Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.
4Close the scanner cover.
Cleaning the ADF parts
Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance. Residue on the ADF parts may cause print
quality issues and false 290–294 paper jam messages.
1Turn the printer off.
2Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with water.
Maintaining the printer 221
3Open the ADF cover.
4Remove the pick roller assembly.
5Wipe the surface of both pick rollers.
Maintaining the printer 222
6Replace the pick roller assembly.
7Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover, including the two small white rollers.
8Wipe the separator pad, and then wipe the pick pad.
Maintaining the printer 223
9Pull the flap up as shown, and then wipe the sensor behind it.
10 Close the flap, and then close the ADF cover.
Cleaning the printhead lenses
Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems.
1Open the top access cover, and then open the front door.
Maintaining the printer 224
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for
more than 10 minutes.
2Remove all four toner cartridges.
Note: Do not remove the photoconductors for this procedure.
3Locate the four printhead lenses.
4Clean the lenses using compressed air.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printhead lenses. Doing so may cause damage.
5Reinstall the toner cartridges.
Maintaining the printer 225
6Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
2
1
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required. For
more information, see “Supplies menu” on page 131.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Maintaining the printer 226
Ordering parts and supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact
the place where you purchased the printer.
Notes:
•Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part. For more information, see “Supplies menu” on
page 131.
•All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
•The printer is designed to send a "low" message to signal when a replacement supply item needs to be
purchased and then a "replace" message when the new supply item, except the waste toner bottle, should be
installed.
•The printer displays a "near full" message when a new waste toner bottle needs to be purchased.
•The ADF replacement parts only post a "replace" message when they reach their expected life.
Ordering a toner cartridge
When a message appears on the printer display indicating which toner cartridge needs to be replaced, immediately
order a new toner cartridge.
For information on replacing a toner cartridge, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO / IEC 19798 standard (with about 5% coverage per color). Extremely low
print coverage (less than 1.25% for a color) for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield for that color
and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
Part name Lexmark Return Program Cartridge Regular cartridge
Black High Yield Toner Cartridge X746H1KG X746H2KG
Yellow Toner Cartridge
Yellow High Yield Toner Cartridge*
X746A1YG
X748H1YG
X746A2YG
X748H2YG
Magenta Toner Cartridge
Magenta High Yield Toner Cartridge*
X746A1MG
X748H1MG
X746A2MG
X748H2MG
Cyan Toner Cartridge
Cyan High Yield Toner Cartridge*
X746A1CG
X748H1CG
X746A2CG
X748H2CG
* These toner cartridges are supported only in X748x printer models.
Ordering a fuser or a transfer module
A message on the printer display appears when the fuser or transfer module needs to be replaced.
For information on replacing the fuser or transfer module, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Maintaining the printer 227
Part name Part number
Fuser 40X8112 (100 V)
40X8110 (115 V)
40X8111 (230 V)
Transfer module 40X8307
Ordering a waste toner bottle
A message on the printer display appears when the waste toner bottle needs to be replaced.
For information on replacing the waste toner bottle, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended.
Part name Part number
Waste toner bottle C734X77G
Ordering ADF replacement parts
Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double-feeding or failing to feed through the ADF.
For information on replacing the ADF parts, see the instruction sheets that came with the parts.
Part name Part number
ADF pick assembly 40X5188
Separator pad 40X5187
ADF pick pad 40X5189
Ordering a photoconductor
A message will appear on the printer display when a photoconductor needs to be replaced.
For information on replacing a photoconductor, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name Part number
Photoconductor C734X20G
Photoconductor, Multi‑Pack C734X24G
Notes:
•All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
•Reset the maintenance counter back to zero after installing the four new photoconductors.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Lexmark printers, parts, and supplies are designed to perform together for superior print quality. We recommend that
you use only genuine Lexmark parts and supplies to help extend the life of your product.
Maintaining the printer 228
Lexmark's warranty does not cover damage caused by non-Lexmark parts and supplies.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
•Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust
Replacing parts and supplies
Replacing a toner cartridge
1Open the printer top access cover, and then open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for
more than 10 minutes.
Maintaining the printer 229
2Pull the green tabs of the specified cartridge up and out to remove the cartridge from the printer.
3Unpack the replacement toner cartridge.
4Place the old cartridge in the recycling bag.
5Place the bag in the shipping box used for the replacement part.
6Shake the replacement cartridge front‑to‑back and side‑to‑side to redistribute the toner.
7Remove the red packing strip from the cartridge.
8Insert the cartridge into the printer.
Maintaining the printer 230
9Close the front door, and then close the printer top access cover.
2
1
Note: When print becomes faded, order a new toner cartridge immediately. A message on the printer display
specifies what color cartridge is low in toner. You can try to extend the life of the cartridges by pulling them out of
the printer and shaking them to redistribute the toner.
Replacing the ADF parts
Note: The printer comes with a spare separator pad and air filter, located under the scanner. To access the spare
parts, remove the slotted screw.
Note: It is recommended that the ADF area and parts be cleaned periodically.
Maintaining the printer 231
Replacing the pick roller assembly
1Turn the printer off, and then open the ADF cover.
2Replace the pick roller assembly, as shown.
3Dispose of the old pick roller assembly.
Maintaining the printer 232
Replacing the separator pad
1With the ADF cover still open, pull up on the separator pad to remove it.
2Replace the separator pad.
3Dispose of the old separator pad.
Maintaining the printer 233
Replacing the pick pad
1With the ADF cover still open, pull straight up on the pick pad to remove it.
2Replace the pick pad with a new one, and then discard the old pad.
3Open the flap to access the sensor lens underneath, and then wipe the lens clean.
Maintaining the printer 234
4Close the flap, and then close the ADF cover.
Replacing the air filter
1Locate the air filter on the back of the printer, and then remove the cover.
Maintaining the printer 235
2Remove the old air filter, and then discard it.
3Replace the air filter, and then replace the cover.
4Turn the printer on.
Maintaining the printer 236
Replacing the waste toner bottle
1Locate the waste toner bottle release button on the left side of the printer.
2Press the release button to the left, and then pull the waste toner bottle out to remove it from the printer.
2
1
3Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.
2
1
4Peel the seal from the side of the full waste toner bottle, and then place it over the hole to seal off the waste toner
bottle.
1 2
5Place the sealed waste toner bottle in the recycling bag.
Maintaining the printer 237
6Place the bag into the shipping box used for the replacement part.
1
2
7Peel the recycling label off and place it on the shipping box.
1 2
8Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer.
1
2
Replacing a photoconductor
1Open the top access cover, and then open the front door.
Maintaining the printer 238
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for
more than 10 minutes.
2Pull the specified photoconductor up, and then slide it to the right to remove it from the printer.
1
2
3Unpack the replacement photoconductor.
1 2 3
Maintaining the printer 239
4Align and insert the left end of the photoconductor, and then press the right end into place.
2
1
5Remove the red packing strip from the top of the photoconductor.
6Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 240
Resetting the maintenance counter
Reset the maintenance counter after installing the new photoconductors. Use any one of the following procedures:
When a “replace” or “low” message does not appear
Follow this procedure when the photoconductors are replaced and no “replace” or “low” message appears:
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Supplies Menu > Replace Supply.
2Touch the buttons that indicate which of the four photoconductors you replaced.
•All
•Cyan Photoconductor
•Magenta Photoconductor
•Yellow Photoconductor
•Black Photoconductor
3When [color] photoconductor replaced appears, touch Yes.
4Touch to return to the home screen.
When a “replace” or “low” message appears
Follow this procedure when the photoconductors are replaced and 84 Replace [color] photoconductor,
84 [color] photoconductor nearly low, or 84 [color] photoconductor low still appears:
1From the home screen, navigate to:
Status/Supplies > Supply Replaced
2When Replaced [color] photoconductor appears, touch Yes.
Notes:
•All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time for optimum print quality.
•Ready appears when the counter is reset.
Moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•Use the handholds located on both sides and rear of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
Maintaining the printer 241
•Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
•Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
•Keep the printer in an upright position.
•Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer 242
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer.
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel, showing printer messages.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings.
Managing the printer 243
3Under Other Settings, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4Select the items for notification, and type the e‑mail addresses.
5Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Managing the printer 244
Clearing jams
By carefully selecting paper and specialty media and loading it properly, you should be able to avoid most jams. If jams
occur, then follow the steps outlined in this chapter.
Note: Jam Recovery is set to Auto by default. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold
the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct paper loading Incorrect paper loading
•Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
•Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
•Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
•Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
•Flex and straighten paper before loading it.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
Clearing jams 245
•Make sure all paper sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
•Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the printer display. Open doors and covers, and
remove trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed papers from the
paper path.
Area name Jam numbers What to do
Inside the printer 200–201 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from behind the toner cartridge area.
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from under the photoconductor units.
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from under the fuser.
Inside the printer 202–203 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from fuser area.
Open the top access cover, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Inside the printer 230 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper located between the front door and Tray 1.
Standard output bin 202–203 Remove all paper from the standard output bin, and
then remove the jammed paper.
Tray [x] 24x Open each tray, and then remove any jams.
Multipurpose feeder 250 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and
then remove the jammed paper.
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 29y.xx Open the ADF cover, and then remove any jammed
paper.
Open the duplex cover, and then remove the jammed
paper.
Scanner cover Open the scanner cover, and then remove any
jammed paper.
Clearing jams 246
200–201 paper jams
Paper jam in the toner cartridge area
1Open the printer top access cover.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
3Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull the paper up and out to remove it from behind
the toner cartridge area.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 247
4Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
5From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Paper jam under the photoconductor units
1Ope the printer top access cover.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
3If lodged under the photoconductor units, then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull
it out .
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4If the jammed paper is lodged too tightly under the photoconductor units, then remove the photoconductor units
and place them on a flat surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
Clearing jams 248
2
1
5Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
6Reinstall each photoconductor unit.
7Close the front door, and then close the printer top access cover.
8From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Paper jam in the fuser area
1Open the printer top access cover.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
3Determine where the jammed paper is located, and then remove it:
aIf the jammed paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
bIf the jammed paper paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly, then firmly grasp the paper
on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 249
cIf the jammed paper is not visible, then remove the fuser unit:
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the roller at the center of the fuser unit. Doing so may damage
the fuser.
1Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them.
2Using the handholds on each side, lift and pull the fuser out of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The fuser might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
dPlace the fuser on a flat surface with the blue thumb screws facing you.
Clearing jams 250
ePull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide.
1
2
fPress the green arrow tab to the left, and then lift the top paper guide.
2
1
gFirmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
hClose the top paper guide. Make sure both sides of the paper guide are firmly seated.
Clearing jams 251
iPull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide.
1
2
jReinstall the fuser unit:
1Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side, and then place it back into the printer.
2Turn the screws clockwise to fasten the fuser securely.
4Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
5From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
202–203 paper jams
If the jammed paper is visible in the standard exit bin, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 252
Paper jam in the fuser area
1Open the printer top access cover.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
3Determine where the jammed paper is located, and then remove it:
aIf the jammed paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
bIf the jammed paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly, then firmly grasp the paper on each
side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 253
cIf the jammed paper is not visible, then remove the fuser unit:
1Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them.
2Using the handholds on each side, lift and pull the fuser out of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The fuser might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
dPlace the fuser on a flat surface with the blue thumb screws facing you.
Clearing jams 254
ePull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide.
1
2
fPress the green arrow tab to the left, and then lift the top paper guide.
2
1
gFirmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
hClose the top paper guide. Make sure both sides of the paper guide are firmly seated.
Clearing jams 255
iPull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide.
1
2
jReinstall the fuser unit:
1Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side, and then insert it back into the printer.
2Turn the screws clockwise to fasten the fuser securely.
4Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
5From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Clearing jams 256
Paper jam inside the printer top access cover
1Open the printer top access cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for
more than 10 minutes.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2Open the front door.
3Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
5From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Clearing jams 257
24x paper jam
Paper jam in Tray 1
1Open Tray 1.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Close Tray 1.
4From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Paper jam in one of the optional trays
1Open the specified tray.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 258
3Close the tray.
4From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
250 paper jam
1Press the paper release lever, and then remove any jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
1
2
2Load new paper into the multipurpose feeder.
3From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
29y.xx paper jams
1Remove all original documents from the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).
2Open the ADF cover, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 259
3Close the ADF cover.
4Open the duplex cover, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
1
2
5Open the scanner cover, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 260
6Close the scanner cover.
7Reload original documents into the ADF, straighten the stack, and then adjust the paper guide.
Clearing jams 261
Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
•The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
•The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
•The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
•Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
•The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
•The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
•All options are properly installed.
•The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Understanding the printer messages
Adjusting color
Wait for the process to complete.
An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive.
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove and reinsert the flash drive.
•If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacement.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected
tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Paper loaded, continue.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
Note: This applies only to printers with tray linking capability.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 262
Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected
tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Paper loaded, continue.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
Note: This applies only to printers with tray linking capability.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected
tray.
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Paper loaded, continue.
•Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
Note: This applies only to printers with tray linking capability.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Close top access cover
Close the printer top access cover to clear the message.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted to recover data on a corrupted hard disk. The printer hard disk cannot be repaired.
From the home screen, touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Disk full, scan job canceled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Troubleshooting 263
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk problem
The printer hard disk must be reformatted.
Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported flash drive is inserted. Remove the flash drive, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
There is not enough memory to send the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Name not set up
The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 264
Fax Station Number not set up
The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the specified tray into the printer.
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the specified tray:
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Install the specified tray.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
•Cancel the print job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper type and size.
•From the printer control panel, touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the print job.
Load [paper source] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper type and size.
•From the printer control panel, touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 265
Load [paper source] with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper size.
•From the printer control panel, touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from the default paper source.
•Cancel the print job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type.
•From the printer control panel, touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from the default paper source.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 266
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
•Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
•Cancel the print job.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been
restarted.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Make sure the analog phone line is plugged into the modem.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
Replace separator pad
Install a new separator pad.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
•Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.
Troubleshooting 267
Scanner ADF Cover Open
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.
Scan Document Too Long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear the
message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.
Supply needed to complete job
A supply needed to complete the job is missing. Try one of the following:
•Touch Prompt for supplies to view all error messages that indicate what supplies are needed to continue processing
the current job.
1Order the missing supply immediately.
2Install the supply. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
•Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the print job.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.
Unsupported disk
An unsupported disk has been inserted. Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator
An error occurred on the Web link server, or the Web link server is not configured properly.
Touch Continue to clear the message. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Troubleshooting 268
31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the missing toner cartridge.
For instructions on removing and installing a cartridge, touch More Information.
•Remove and reinstall the defective toner cartridge.
Note: If the message is not cleared, then replace the defective cartridge.
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the unsupported toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.
34 Incorrect paper size, open [src]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray.
•Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray. Make sure this size is the size you are
trying to print.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
•Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
•Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type.
•Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.
•Cancel the print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
•To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the
menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
•Install additional memory.
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
•Cancel the current print job.
Troubleshooting 269
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
•Install additional printer memory.
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Cancel job to clear the message.
•Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
•Install additional printer memory.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current print job.
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
•Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Troubleshooting 270
53 Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
•Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.
54 Network [x] software error
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
•Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer.
54 Serial option [x] error
Try one or more of the following:
•Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.
•Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and host computer.
•Touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to continue printing.
•Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
•Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
55 Unsupported option in slot [x]
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 271
56 Parallel port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
•Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
•Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 USB port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored
Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:
•The printer firmware has been updated.
•Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.
•The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.
•The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
58 Input config error
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Check if all tray configurations are correct. Remove unnecessary trays if needed.
Troubleshooting 272
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many disks installed
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the excess disks.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many flash options installed
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the excess flash memory.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many trays attached
1Turn the printer off.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the additional trays.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
59 Incompatible tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the specified tray.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the defective printer hard disk.
•Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
Troubleshooting 273
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
63 Unformatted disk
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Format the printer hard disk.
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.
80.xx Fuser near life warning
1Order a replacement fuser immediately.
2When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement
part.
3Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
80.xx Fuser life warning
•Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the
instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
•Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
80.xx Replace fuser
Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
80.xx Fuser missing
1Replace the fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle
1Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 274
82.xx Waste toner bottle missing
Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer.
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full
Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately.
1Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
83.xx Replace transfer module
Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
83.xx Transfer module life warning
1Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
83.xx Transfer module missing
Insert the transfer module into the printer.
83.xx Transfer module near life warning
1Order a replacement transfer module immediately.
2From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
3When print quality is reduced, install the new transfer module.
For instructions on installing the transfer module, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part
or touch More Information on the printer home screen.
84.xx [color] photoconductor missing
Install the specified color photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
84.xx [color] photoconductor nearly low
1Order a replacement photoconductor.
2When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
3Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 275
84.xx [Color] photoconductor low
1Order a replacement photoconductor immediately.
2When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement supply.
Notes:
•All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
•Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.
3Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
84.xx Replace [color] photoconductor
1Replace the photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement supply.
Notes:
•All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
•Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.
2From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88 Replace [color] cartridge
The specified print or toner cartridge is empty.
1Replace the specified cartridge.
For instructions on replacing cartridge, from the printer control panel, touch More Information.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low
The specified print cartridge is critically low.
1For instructions on replacing a print cartridge, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.xx [color] cartridge low
1Remove the specified cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.
3Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Troubleshooting 276
Notes:
•Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded. When the print remains faded, replace the
cartridge.
•Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily.
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low
Order a replacement for the specified print cartridge.
88.xx [Color] cartridge very low
The specified print cartridge is very low.
1For instructions on replacing a print cartridge, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
29y.xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message.
•Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
•Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
•Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, and e-mailing.
280.06 Paper missing
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue to clear the message.
•Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message.
•Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
•Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
•Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, or e‑mailing.
•Touch Restart job to clear the message and start a new scan job with the same settings as the previous job.
Troubleshooting 277
840.01 Scanner disabled by admin
Print without the scanner or contact your system support person.
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
Try one or more of the following:
•Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
•Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to bring the scanner back online.
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds, and then disables the download emulator on the firmware
card.
Solving printing problems
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.
1Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
If Ready does not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.
Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the flash drive is supported.
Print jobs do not print
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER
From the printer control panel, check the status. If necessary, follow the recovery instructions.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job.
Troubleshooting 278
CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT
Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply.
CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.
CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
•Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
•If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported
operating system and using a compatible printer software.
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY
•Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
•Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected,
then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support
person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
•Delete the print job, and then print it again.
•For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
Troubleshooting 279
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting
all jobs except the first one.
•For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents"
check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.
•For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the
printer.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Print job takes longer than expected
Try one or more of the following:
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print
job.
TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off >
CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS
When using Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.
Printing slows down
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE TO USE PAPER NOT NARROW ENOUGH TO INVOKE THE SLOWDOWN MODE
Place larger paper such as Letter and A4 in the tray, and then print the same file.
Note: The slowdown mode functions as designed. This is to protect the fuser from becoming damaged by large
temperature differentials across its length.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Troubleshooting 280
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper size settings.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
Incorrect characters print
•Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace
mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
•Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
•Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
•Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
•Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
•If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You
must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the job.
Troubleshooting 281
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Unexpected page breaks occur
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
2Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears.
3Touch Submit.
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:
1Lift the scanner unit.
2Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3Lower the scanner unit.
Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:
•Blank pages
•Checkerboard pattern
•Distorted graphics or pictures
•Missing characters
•Faded print
Troubleshooting 282
•Dark print
•Skewed lines
•Smudges
•Streaks
•Unexpected characters
•White lines in print
Try one or more of the following:
CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES
Check the display and clear any error messages.
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
When the print remains faded, replace the toner or print cartridge.
CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS
The scanner glass may be dirty. Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 221.
ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY
Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus.
MAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY
Check the quality of the original document.
PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS
When patterns (moiré) appear in the output:
•On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > lower the Sharpness setting
•On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.
Troubleshooting 283
When the text is light or disappearing:
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Content > Text > > select the appropriate source for the original document being copied >
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > increase the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal, and then reduce the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Contrast > increase the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
When the output appears washed out or overexposed:
•On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.
•From the Copy screen, adjust the Darkness setting.
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting
Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Troubleshooting 284
Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:
•The printer is turned on.
•The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
•The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
•The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
•The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
•Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem
with the scanner.
Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.
Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
Troubleshooting 285
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on page 221.
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Troubleshooting 286
Solving fax problems
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e‑mail. To set up fax and e‑mail, follow these steps:
Note: Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network, make sure the fax cables are connected.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submit
2Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.
3From the printer control panel, touch your language.
4Touch your country or region, and then touch Continue.
5Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
6Touch Fax and E‑mail to clear the icons, and then touch Continue.
Note: You can use these same steps to disable fax and e‑mail.
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to
determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:
•Telephone
•Handset
•Answering machine
Troubleshooting 287
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2Listen for a dial tone.
3If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services
can be used.
•If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN
provider.
•If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,
contact your DSL provider.
•If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE
•Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
•If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending
a fax.
•If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.
CHECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
Troubleshooting 288
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1Dial the fax number.
2Scan the original document one page at a time.
Can send but not receive faxes
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers. If you have extension
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep
the Ring Delay setting at 4.
1Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Rings to Answer field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
4Click Submit.
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the toner or print cartridge.
Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Troubleshooting 289
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
•Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
•As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.
Received fax has poor print quality
Try one or more of the following:
RESEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
•Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
•Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
•Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the prints appear faded, replace the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:
1Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Max Speed box, click one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
4Click Submit.
Solving home screen application problems
An application error has occurred
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Troubleshooting 290
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
•View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings or Configuration.
3Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4Click System tab > Log
5From the Filter menu, select an application status.
6From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.
MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE
Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user.
To help prevent errors, make sure either Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file is selected in the destination
configuration settings.
ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS
In the destination configuration settings, lower the scan settings. For example, to lower the scan resolution, disable
Color, or change the “Content type” setting to Text.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.
Forms and Favorites troubleshooting
Forms are not available or are not working
MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK POINTING TO THE FORM IS IN THE BOOKMARKS ROOT FOLDER
If the bookmark pointing to the form was created in a subfolder of the Bookmarks folder, then it will not be available
under the Forms solution. Delete the bookmark and recreate it under the Bookmarks root folder.
MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK IS POINTING TO THE CORRECT LOCATION
The printer does not validate bookmarks. If the URL or network location that was specified when the bookmark was
created is incorrect, then the printer will not be able to access the document.
MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK IS CREATED WITH FORMS AND FAVORITES
If the bookmark is created using another application, then it cannot be accessed in Forms and Favorites.
Troubleshooting 291
A network destination stopped working or is invalid
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER AUTHENTICATION IS CONFIGURED
If the application is configured to use MFP authentication credentials, then the printer authentication settings must
be configured from the Embedded Web Server.
For more information on configuring the printer authentication settings, see the Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide available on www.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE DESTINATION IS SHARED AND HAS A VALID NETWORK ADDRESS
Check that the folder or source file is set to be shared across the network.
If the destination has been moved, then the network address may have changed. The destination network address
can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CONNECTED TO THE NETWORK
Make sure that all appropriate network cables are securely connected and that the network settings of the printer
are correctly configured. For information on networking the printer, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD that came with the printer.
IF THE SOURCE FILE AND PRINTER RESIDE IN DIFFERENT DOMAINS, THEN MAKE SURE THE DOMAIN INFORMATION IS SPECIFIED
If the source file exists within a different domain than the printer, then you can edit the destination from the
application configuration page and enter the appropriate domain information in the Network Address and Network
Domain fields. If you do not know the network address of the computer where your source file resides, then consult
your system support person.
You can also add the domain name to the Domain Search Order list under the printer network setup.
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
•View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Settings or Configuration.
3Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4Click System tab > Log.
5From the Filter menu, select an application status.
6From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.
Troubleshooting 292
Scan to Network troubleshooting
The application icon is missing from the home screen
MAKE SURE TO ENABLE AT LEAST ONE VALID DESTINATION
DISPLAY THE APPLICATION ICON WHEN NO DESTINATIONS ARE AVAILABLE
1From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3Click the name of the application > Configure.
4From the Home Screen Button section, select Always show button under Display Option, and then click Apply.
Printer cannot scan to the selected destination
MAKE SURE THE DESTINATION IS VALID
Verify that the destination is valid in the application configuration settings.
If the destination has been moved, then the network address may have changed. The destination network address
can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server.
IF THE PRINTER AND DESTINATION RESIDE IN DIFFERENT DOMAINS, THEN MAKE SURE THE DOMAIN INFORMATION IS SPECIFIED
If the destination exists within a different Windows domain than the printer, then you can edit the destination from
the application configuration page and enter the appropriate Windows domain information in the domain field as
part of the Network Folder Address. You can also add the domain name to the Domain Search Order list under the
printer network setup.
MAKE SURE THE FIREWALL SOFTWARE IS ALLOWING COMMUNICATION
If the destination resides on a computer that uses a newer version of the Windows operating system (Windows XP
or later), and the Windows Firewall is enabled, then the printer may have difficulty sending information to the
destination if the destination and the printer reside on different subnets. The Windows Firewall must either be
configured to allow communication with the subnet the printer resides on, or the destination should be set up on
the same subnet as the printer. For more information, contact your system support person.
MAKE SURE A FILE WITH THE DEFAULT FILE NAME DOES NOT ALREADY EXIST IN THE DESTINATION
If the three configuration settings for the File Name section of the application configuration page are not selected
(allow user to enter file name; append time stamp; overwrite existing file), and a file using the default file name
already exists within the destination, then there will be no method in place to distinguish the newly scanned file from
the file present in the destination. The printer will not be able to overwrite the old file, the new file will not receive
a time stamp to differentiate it from the old file, and the user will not be able to give the new file a different name.
In this case, the old file must either be removed from the destination, or one of the previously mentioned settings
must be turned on.
Troubleshooting 293
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK IS FUNCTIONING AND THE PRINTER CAN COMMUNICATE
Verify all network connections and that the network settings of the printer are configured appropriately. For
information on networking the printer, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD that came
with the printer.
FOR NETWORKS USING LDAP AUTHENTICATION, MAKE SURE LDAP SETTINGS HAVE BEEN CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
Verify that LDAP settings are configured appropriately in your printer setup, and in the setup dialog. For more
information on LDAP settings, contact your system support person.
MAKE SURE YOU HAVE PERMISSION TO SAVE SCANS TO THIS DESTINATION
On the application Edit Destination screen, clear the contents of the Path Suffix field; or on the destination server,
change the user home folder to match the contents of the Path Suffix field.
My MFP troubleshooting
Error reading USB drive
Some flash drives may not be compatible with the printer. At a minimum, the flash drive should:
•Be USB 2.0‑compatible
•Support the Full Speed standard (low‑speed devices will not work)
•Have a USB type “A” connector
•Support the FAT file system (NTFS file system not supported)
For a list of tested and approved flash drives, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Nothing happens when USB drive is inserted
If nothing happens within a few seconds after you insert your USB drive into the MFP, then use of USB drives may be
disabled on the device. Contact your system support person for more information.
I forgot the password to My MFP
If you forget the password for your My MFP profile, then you must delete the profile from your USB drive, insert the
drive into an MFP, and then run the setup wizard again. To manually delete the My MFP profile from your USB drive:
1Insert your USB drive into a computer.
2Locate the .mymfp.preferences file, as well as any other files beginning with .mymfp (they will be grouped together).
3Delete all files beginning with .mymfp.
Troubleshooting 294
Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
Try one or more of the following:
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1Turn the printer off using the power switch.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.
3Check the connection between the option and the printer.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or
go to www.lexmark.com to view the option instruction sheet.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option.
For more information, see “Adding available options in the print driver” on page 45.
Paper tray problems
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1Open the paper tray.
2Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Troubleshooting 295
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not
be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that
came with the paper tray, or go to http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.
2,000-sheet drawer problems
CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION
Make sure the 2,000‑sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer.
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
CLEAR ANY JAMS
Open the tray or feeder, and then remove any jammed paper.
AVOID PAPER JAMS
•Flex the paper.
•Make sure the drawer is properly installed.
•Make sure paper is loaded correctly.
•Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum fill line indicated in the tray.
•Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged.
•Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded.
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Cannot detect flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Cannot detect printer hard disk
Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Troubleshooting 296
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT (ISP) CONNECTIONS
Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions (ISP) port.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS
•Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board.
•Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For more information on installing the network printing software, do the following:
1Open the Software and Documentation CD.
2Click Additional.
3Under Publications on this CD, select Networking Guide.
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
CHECK THE USB/PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION
Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
Troubleshooting 297
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located in the tray or feeder.
MAKE SURE THE ENTIRE PAPER STACK IS SITTING FLAT IN THE TRAY
Before loading the paper, do the following:
•Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
•Straighten the edges on a level surface.
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
CHECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.
Jammed pages are not reprinted
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
2Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
3Touch Submit.
Troubleshooting 298
Solving print quality problems
If these suggestions do not correct the problem, then contact customer support. You may have a printer part that
requires adjustment or replacement.
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the
software program.
Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages
You may notice fine, horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color. This can occur when
the printer is in Quiet Mode. To fix this, set Quiet Mode to Off (Image/Photo).
Troubleshooting 299
Gray background
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:
•From the printer control panel Quality menu, change the setting.
•For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Incorrect margins
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
•For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Troubleshooting 300
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective photoconductor unit.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer module.
CLEAN THE PRINTHEAD LENSES
1Open the front door, and then the internal cover.
2Locate the printhead wipers.
3Gently pull the printhead wiper out until it stops, and then slowly slide it back into place.
4Clean the remaining three printhead lenses.
Paper curl
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Troubleshooting 301
Print irregularities
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer module. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Troubleshooting 302
Print is too dark
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too dark, the Brightness setting may be too dark, or the Contrast setting may be
too high.
•Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
•For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users:
1Choose File > Print.
2From the “Orientation pictures” menu, choose Printer Features.
3Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
•From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
•For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
Print is too light
Troubleshooting 303
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too light, the Brightness setting may be too light, or the Contrast setting may be
too low.
•Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
•For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties
•For Macintosh users:
1Choose File > Print.
2From the print options pop-up menu, choose Printer Features.
3Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
•From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
•For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
1Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.
Troubleshooting 304
Printer is printing blank pages
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
1Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.
Repeating defects appear on prints
)
)
)
Try one or more of the following:
REPLACE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the cartridge of the color with the repeating defect, if the defects occur in the following instances:
•Every 33 mm (1.30 in.) of the page
•Every 35.3 mm (1.39 in.) of the page
Troubleshooting 305
REPLACE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR
Replace the photoconductor of the color with the repeating defect, if the defects occur in the following instances:
•Every 28.3 mm (1.11 in.) of the page
•Every 72.4 mm (2.85 in.) of the page
REPLACE THE FUSER
Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances:
•Every 47.4 mm (1.87 in.) of the page
•Every 94.8 mm (3.73 in.) of the page
•Every 113 mm (4.45 in.) of the page
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray:
1From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct paper type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective photoconductor.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
1Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge.
Troubleshooting 306
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced.
Skewed print
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Adjust the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
•Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack.
•Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack.
CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CLEAN OR IS NOT CONTAMINATED WITH PAPER DUST
Clean the exterior of the printer
1Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4Wipe only the exterior of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.
MAKE SURE THE PAPER FEED ROLLERS ARE CLEAN AND ARE NOT CONTAMINATED WITH DUST
1Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
2Remove the paper feed rollers.
Note: For instructions on how to remove and reinstall the paper feed rollers, see the setup sheet that came with
the rollers inside the compartment box of Tray 1.
3Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Troubleshooting 307
4Clean the paper feed rollers.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the rubber. Doing so will damage the rollers.
5Reinstall the paper feed rollers.
Note: Make sure to replace the worn or defective paper feed rollers.
Solid color pages
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE AND IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor. If the problem continues, then the photoconductor may need to be
replaced.
Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper
Try one or more of the following:
ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT
If the fill pattern is incorrect, choose a different fill pattern from your software program.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE
•Use only the recommended transparencies.
•Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder.
•Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or
feeder.
Troubleshooting 308
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print
cartridge:
1Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3Reinsert the print cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
•From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select Default Source.
•For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see or clean any visible toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact Customer
Support.
Troubleshooting 309
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
•From the printer control panel Paper menu, select Default Source
•For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY OR IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Reinstall or replace the defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective transfer module.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the word or defective photoconductor unit.
Troubleshooting 310
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective fuser.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS RECALIBRATED RECENTLY
Perform color adjust from the Quality menu.
MAKE SURE THE APPLICATION HAS NOT SPECIFIED AN OFF‑WHITE BACKGROUND
Check the application settings.
MAKE SURE NO TONER IS IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact customer support.
Toner rubs off
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings. Change the Paper
Weight setting from Normal to Heavy.
2Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the
tray or feeder. If necessary, change the Paper Texture setting from Normal to Rough.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement
part.
Troubleshooting 311
Toner specks
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective or worn cartridges.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective photoconductor unit.
CALL CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:
1From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
•For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
•For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Solving color quality problems
FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue
needed to produce a certain color.
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers,
and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the
amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.
Troubleshooting 312
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow
users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The
color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the
application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text
while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.
Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are
many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how
the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color‑matching problems, see the question, “How
can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?”
The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?
Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be
caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust
the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make
subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of
toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and
yellow could potentially improve the color balance.
My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain
the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector
must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print
on the recommended type of color transparencies.
What is manual color correction?
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color conversion tables to process
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user‑defined color conversion will be implemented.
Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how
the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).
Notes:
•Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating
system controls the adjustment of colors.
•The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred
colors for the majority of documents.
To manually apply a different color conversion table:
1From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the
affected object type.
Troubleshooting 313
Object type Color conversion tables
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics
•Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied
to all incoming color formats.
•sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors
displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for
printing photographs.
•Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the
colors displayed on a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create
all levels of neutral gray.
•sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB
Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business
graphics.
•Off—No color correction is implemented.
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
•US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP
(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.
•Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color
output.
•Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color
correction setting.
•Off—No color correction is implemented.
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color
Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple‑page printout consisting
of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table
selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box
through the selected color conversion table.
By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color
combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For
more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the
selected color conversion table for the particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction
setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the
color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color
Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color conversion is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating
system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting
printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?
Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed
Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user‑defined RGB or
CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment
box.
Troubleshooting 314
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:
1Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
•View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2Click Configuration > Color Samples > Detailed Options.
3Select a color conversion table.
4Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.
5Enter an increment value from 1–255.
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.
6Click Print.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER
•Depending on the network settings, you may need to type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer
IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.
•Make sure printer IP address is correct.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For
more information, contact your system support person.
Contacting customer support
When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1‑800‑539‑6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 315
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark X746x, X748x
Machine type:
7526
Model(s):
576, 776
Edition notice
October 2014
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2014 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 316
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
MarkTrack and PrintCryption are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Notices 317
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the documentation CD.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M01-003; FCC ID: IYLM01003; IC: 2376A-M01003
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 53
Scanning 54
Copying 54
Ready 35
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 318
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of lead,
mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.
Battery notice
This product contains Perchlorate material. Special handling may apply. For more information, go to
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6-32.2°C (60-90°F)
Shipping and storage temperature -40° to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)
Static sensitivity notice
Notices 319
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Mercury statement
This product contains mercury in the lamp (<5mg Hg). Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance:
www.eiae.org.
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
Notices 320
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption
(Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs. 560
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original documents. 600
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 85
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 55
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 11
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.5
Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned off. 0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 321
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
•Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and
2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on the restrictions of
use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Notices 322
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Notices 323
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
South Africa telecommunications notice
This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Notices 324
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
•There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
•The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
•The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives
metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines
in Switzerland.
Notices 325
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877)
devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute
installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die
Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte
vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che
ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le
linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Notices 326
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
Notices 327
RO SE SI SK TR UK
Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
LietuviųŠiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Notices 328
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Notices 329
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Notices 330
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.
Notices 331
Index
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 278
2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
loading 67
2000‑sheet drawer
installing 42
200–201 paper jams 247
202–203 paper jams 252
24x paper jam 258
250 paper jam 259
280.06 Paper missing 277
29y.xx Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job 277
29y.xx paper jams 259
31.xx Missing or defective [color]
cartridge 269
32.xx [color] cartridge part number
unsupported by device 269
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[src] 269
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 269
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 270
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 269
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted 270
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 270
38 Memory full 270
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 270
51 Defective flash detected 270
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 270
53 Unformatted flash detected 271
54 Network [x] software error 271
54 Serial option [x] error 271
54 Standard network software
error 271
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 271
550‑sheet drawer
installing 42
550‑sheet specialty media drawer
installing 42
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional)
loading 57
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 272
56 Serial port [x] disabled 272
56 Standard USB port disabled 272
56 USB port [x] disabled 272
57 Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored 272
58 Input config error 272
58 Too many disks installed 273
58 Too many flash options
installed 273
58 Too many trays attached 273
59 Incompatible tray [x] 273
61 Remove defective disk 273
62 Disk full 274
63 Unformatted disk 274
80.xx Fuser life warning 274
80.xx Fuser missing 274
80.xx Fuser near life warning 274
80.xx Replace fuser 274
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 274
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 275
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 275
83.xx Replace transfer module 275
83.xx Transfer module life
warning 275
83.xx Transfer module missing 275
83.xx Transfer module near life
warning 275
84.xx [Color] photoconductor
low 276
84.xx [color] photoconductor
missing 275
84.xx [color] photoconductor nearly
low 275
84.xx Replace [color]
photoconductor 276
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 278
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 278
88 Replace [color] cartridge 276
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically
low 276
88.xx [color] cartridge low 276, 277
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 277
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 19
accessing the system board 24
Active NIC menu 141
adding a date and time stamp 97
adding hardware options
print driver 45
ADF
copying using 90
ADF parts
cleaning 221
replacing 231
ADF pick assembly
ordering 228
ADF pick pad
ordering 228
adjusting brightness
Embedded Web Server 213
printer display 213
Adjusting color 262
adjusting copy quality 94
adjusting Sleep mode 212
adjusting toner darkness 82
advanced options, touch‑screen
copy 100
e‑mail 107
fax 120
FTP 126
scanning to computer 129
air filter
replacing 231
AppleTalk menu 146
application icon is missing 293
applications
home screen 20
attaching cables 43
Index 332
attaching the system board
cover 24
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) 12
available internal options 24
avoiding paper jams 245
B
black‑and‑white copying 92
black‑and‑white printing 81
blocking junk faxes 118
buttons, printer control panel 13
buttons, touch screen
using 17
C
cables
Ethernet 43
USB 43
calling customer support 315
canceling a print job
from a computer 89
from the printer control panel 89
canceling an e-mail 104
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 315
card stock
tips 88
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 263
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 262
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 263
changing output file type
e‑mailing 104
checking an unresponsive
printer 262
checking an unresponsive
scanner 285
checking status of parts and
supplies 226
checking the status of parts and
supplies 226
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 243
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 243
choosing a fax connection 109
cleaning
ADF parts 221
exterior of the printer 220
interior of the printer 220
printhead lenses 224
scanner glass 221
Close front door 263
Close top access cover 263
collating copies 95
confidential data
information on securing 219
confidential print jobs 85
printing from a Macintosh
computer 85
printing from Windows 85
Confidential Print menu 156
configuration information
wireless network 46
Configure MP menu 135
configuring e‑mail settings 101
configuring port settings 52
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 111
connecting the printer to
regional adapters 112
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 213
conserving supplies 210
Eco‑Mode 211
Hibernate mode 212
Quiet Mode 211
Sleep Mode 212
conserving supplies 210
contacting customer support 315
control panel, printer 13
copy quality
adjusting 94
copy screen
advanced options 100
options 98, 99, 100, 125
Copy Settings menu 167
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 282
partial document or photo
copies 284
poor copy quality 282
poor scanned image quality 285
scanner unit does not close 282
copying
adding a date and time stamp 97
adding an overlay message 97
adjusting quality 94
canceling a copy job 97, 98
collating copies 95
custom job (job build) 96
different paper sizes 93
enlarging 94
in black‑and‑white 92
multiple pages on one sheet 96
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 93
on letterhead 91
on transparencies 91
photos 91
placing separator sheets between
copies 95
quick copy 90
reducing 94
selecting a tray 92
to a different size 92
using the ADF 90
using the scanner glass
(flatbed) 91
copying different paper sizes 93
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 96
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 93
copying on letterhead 91
copying on transparencies 91
copying photos 91
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 114
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 122
creating profiles
using the ScanBack Utility 127
custom name
configuring 73
Custom Names menu 139
custom paper type name
assigning 73
creating 73
Custom Scan Sizes menu 139
Custom Type [x]
changing name 73
changing paper type 73
Custom Types menu 138
D
date and time, fax
setting 113
Index 333
daylight saving time, faxing 113
Default Source menu 132
different paper sizes, copying 93
directory list
printing 86
Disk corrupted 263
Disk full, scan job canceled 263
disk wiping 217
display troubleshooting
display is blank 278
display shows only diamonds 278
display, printer control panel 13
adjusting brightness 213
disposing of printer hard disk 215
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 111
documents, printing
from Macintosh 81
from Windows 81
duplexing 93
E
Eco‑Mode setting 211
Edit Security Setups menu 154
Embedded Web Server
accessing 19
administrator settings 243
checking the status of parts 226
checking the status of
supplies 226
creating a fax destination
shortcut 114
creating an FTP shortcut 122
creating e‑mail shortcuts 102
initial fax setup 109
networking settings 243
problem accessing 315
setting up e‑mail alerts 243
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
where to find 243
Embedded Web Server — Security:
Administrator’s Guide
where to find 219
emission
notices 318, 322, 323, 326
encrypting the printer hard
disk 218
enlarging a copy 94
envelopes
loading 69
tips 87
environmental settings
conserving supplies 210
display brightness, adjusting 213
Eco‑Mode 211
Hibernate mode 212
Quiet Mode 211
Sleep Mode 212
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 156
erasing hard disk memory 217
erasing non‑volatile memory 216
erasing volatile memory 216
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB 264
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 46
Ethernet port 43
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 46
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 22
exterior of the printer
cleaning 220
e‑mail
canceling 104
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 243
paper jam 243
setting up 243
e‑mail function
setting up 101
e‑mail options
Send As 106
e‑mail screen
advanced options 106, 107
options 105, 106
E‑mail Settings menu 180
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 102
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 103
using the address book 103
e‑mailing
adding message line 104
adding subject line 104
configuring e‑mail settings 101
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 102
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 102
setting up e‑mail function 101
using a shortcut number 103
using the address book 103
using the printer control
panel 103
F
factory defaults
restoring 213
FAQ about color printing 312
fax
sending 115
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 287
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 287
fax connection
connecting the printer to the wall
jack 110
connecting to a DSL line 110
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 111
fax connections
regional adapters 112
fax log
viewing 117
Fax memory full 264
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 171
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 179
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 264
fax screen
advanced options 119, 120
options 118, 119, 120
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 264
Fax Station Name not set up 264
Fax Station Number not set up 265
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 287
can receive but not send
faxes 289
can send but not receive
faxes 289
cannot send or receive a fax 287
received fax has poor print
quality 290
faxing
blocking junk faxes 118
Index 334
canceling a fax job 118
changing resolution 116
choosing a fax connection 109
configuring the printer to observe
daylight saving time 113
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 114
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 114
distinctive ring service 111
fax setup 109
forwarding faxes 121
holding faxes 120
making a fax lighter or darker 117
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 117
sending using the printer control
panel 114
setting the date and time 113
setting the fax number or station
number 112
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 112
viewing a fax log 117
FCC notices 318, 323, 326
finding more information about the
printer 8
Finishing menu 197
firmware card
installing 30
flash drive
printing from 83
Flash Drive menu 190
flash drives
supported file types 84
flash memory card
installing 30
troubleshooting 296
font sample list
printing 86
Forms and Favorites
setting up 20
forwarding faxes 121
FTP
scanning using address book 124
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 123
FTP screen
advanced options 126
options 124, 125
FTP Settings menu 186
fuser
ordering 227
G
General Settings menu 160
green settings
Eco‑Mode 211
Hibernate mode 212
Quiet Mode 211
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 45
held jobs 85
printing from a Macintosh
computer 85
printing from Windows 85
Help menu 208
Hibernate mode
using 212
hiding icons on the home screen 19
holding faxes 120
home screen
hiding icons 19
showing icons 19
home screen applications
configuring 20
finding information 20
home screen buttons and icons
description 15
HTML menu 207
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 19
showing 19
Image menu 208
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 22
initial fax setup 109
using the Embedded Web
Server 109
Install Tray [x] 265
installing on a wireless network
using Windows 47
installing options
order of installation 41
installing printer 45
on wireless network 47
installing printer hard disk 35
installing printer on a wireless
network
using Macintosh 49
interior of the printer
cleaning 220
internal print server
troubleshooting 297
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 52
installing 31
troubleshooting 297
IPv6 menu 145
J
jams
avoiding 245
locating jam areas 246
locations 246
numbers 246
jams, clearing
200–201 paper jams 247
202–203 paper jams 252
24x paper jam 258
250 paper jam 259
290–294 221
29y.xx paper jams 259
Job Accounting menu 201
L
labels, paper
tips 88
letterhead
copying on 91
loading, 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder 67
tips on using 86
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears on
prints 301
light, indicator 13
linking trays 72, 73
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 265
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] 265
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 266
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 266
Index 335
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 267
loading
2,000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder 67
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional) 57
envelopes 69
letterhead in 2,000‑sheet
high‑capacity feeder 67
multipurpose feeder 69
optional 550‑sheet special media
tray 61
transparencies 69
loading the optional special media
tray 61
loading the optional tray 57
loading the standard tray 57
lock, security 215
locking the system board 215
M
maintenance counter,
resetting 241
making copies using paper from
selected tray 92
Max Speed and Max Yield
using 82
memory
types installed on printer 215
memory card
installing 29
troubleshooting 296
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 267
menu settings page
printing 55
menus
Active NIC 141
AppleTalk 146
Confidential Print 156
Configure MP 135
Copy Settings 167
Custom Names 139
Custom Scan Sizes 139
Custom Types 138
Default Source 132
diagram of 130
Edit Security Setups 154
Erase Temporary Data Files 156
E‑mail Settings 180
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 171
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 179
Finishing 197
Flash Drive 190
FTP Settings 186
General Settings 160
Help 208
HTML 207
Image 208
IPv6 145
Job Accounting 201
Miscellaneous 155
Network [x] 141
Network Card 143
OCR Settings 195
Paper Loading 137
Paper Size/Type 132
Paper Weight 135
Parallel [x] 148
PCL Emul 204
PDF 203
PostScript 203
Quality 199
Reports 140, 143
Security Audit Log 157
Serial [x] 150
Set Date/Time 159
Setup 195
SMTP Setup menu 153
Standard Network 141
Standard USB 147
Substitute Size 135
Supplies 131
TCP/IP 144
Universal Setup 139
Utilities 202
Wireless 145
XPS 203
menus diagram 130
Miscellaneous menu 155
mobile device
printing from 83
moving the printer 9, 241, 242
multipurpose feeder
loading 69
My MFP
setting up 21
troubleshooting, forgot
password 294
N
Network [x] menu 141
Network Card menu 143
network options 24
network setup page
printing 56
Networking Guide
where to find 243
No analog phone line connected to
modem, fax is disabled. 267
noise emission levels 318
non‑volatile memory 215
erasing 216
notices 317, 318, 319, 320, 321,
322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327
O
OCR Settings menu 195
optional 550‑sheet special media
tray
loading 61
optional special media tray
loading 61
optional tray
loading 57
options
2000‑sheet drawer 42
550‑sheet drawer 42
550‑sheet specialty media
drawer 42
firmware card 30
firmware cards 24
flash memory card 30
Internal Solutions Port 31
list 24
memory card 29
memory cards 24
network 24
order of installation 41
ports 24
printer hard disk, installing 35
printer hard disk, removing 40
options, touch‑screen
copy 98, 99, 100, 125
e‑mail 105, 106
fax 118, 119, 120
FTP 124, 125
scan 128
scan to computer 128, 129
ordering
fuser 227
Index 336
photoconductors 228
toner cartridges 227
transfer module 227
waste toner bottle 228
output file type
changing 104
scan image 124
P
paper
characteristics 74
different sizes, copying 93
letterhead 75
preprinted forms 75
recycled 76, 210
saving 96
selecting 75
storing 77
unacceptable 75, 76
Universal size setting 57
Paper changes needed 267
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 298
paper jams
avoiding 245
paper jams, clearing
200–201 paper jams 247
202–203 paper jams 252
24x paper jam 258
250 paper jam 259
290–294 221
29y.xx paper jams 259
Paper Loading menu 137
paper size
setting 57
Universal 139
Paper Size/Type menu 132
paper sizes
supported 78
paper type
setting 57
paper types
supported by printer 80
where to load 80
Paper Weight menu 135
paper weights
supported by printer 80
Parallel [x] menu 148
parts
checking status 226
checking, from printer control
panel 226
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 226
using genuine Lexmark 228
PCL Emul menu 204
PDF menu 203
photoconductor
replacing 238
photoconductor maintenance
counter
resetting 241
photoconductors
ordering 228
photos
copying 91
pick pad
replacing 231
pick roller assembly
replacing 231
placing separator sheets between
copies 95
port settings
configuring 52
PostScript menu 203
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 46
print driver
hardware options, adding 45
print job
canceling, from computer 89
print quality
cleaning the ADF parts 221
cleaning the printhead lenses 224
cleaning the scanner glass 221
replacing photoconductors 238
print quality troubleshooting
black streaks on a page 308
blank pages 305
characters have jagged edges 299
clipped images 299
fine horizontal lines 299
gray background 300
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
on prints 301
poor transparency quality 312
print irregularities 302
print is too dark 303
print is too light 303
repeating defects 305
shadow images appear on
prints 306
skewed print 307
solid color pages 308
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 309
streaked vertical lines on
prints 310
toner fog or background shading
on the page 310
toner rubs off 311
toner specks 312
white streaks on a page 308
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 278
held jobs do not print 279
incorrect characters print 281
incorrect margins 300
jammed pages are not
reprinted 298
job prints from wrong tray 281
job prints on wrong paper 281
jobs do not print 278
Large jobs do not collate 281
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 278
paper curl 301
paper frequently jams 298
print job takes longer than
expected 280
printing slows down 280
tray linking does not work 281
unexpected page breaks
occur 282
printer 45
basic model 10
fully configured 10
minimum clearances 9
moving 9, 241, 242
selecting a location 9
shipping 242
printer configurations 10
printer control panel 13
factory defaults, restoring 213
printer hard disk
disposing of 215
encrypting 218
installing 35
removing 40
troubleshooting 296
wiping 217
printer hard disk encryption 218
Index 337
printer hard disk memory
erasing 217
printer information
where to find 8
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 278
280.06 Paper missing 277
29y.xx Close flatbed cover and
load originals if restarting
job 277
31.xx Missing or defective [color]
cartridge 269
32.xx [color] cartridge part
number unsupported by
device 269
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[src] 269
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 269
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 270
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 269
37 Insufficient memory, some
Held Jobs were deleted 270
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 270
38 Memory full 270
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 270
51 Defective flash detected 270
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 270
53 Unformatted flash
detected 271
54 Network [x] software error 271
54 Serial option [x] error 271
54 Standard network software
error 271
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 271
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 272
56 Serial port [x] disabled 272
56 Standard USB port
disabled 272
56 USB port [x] disabled 272
57 Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored 272
58 Input config error 272
58 Too many disks installed 273
58 Too many flash options
installed 273
58 Too many trays attached 273
59 Incompatible tray [x] 273
61 Remove defective disk 273
62 Disk full 274
63 Unformatted disk 274
80.xx Fuser life warning 274
80.xx Fuser missing 274
80.xx Fuser near life warning 274
80.xx Replace fuser 274
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 274
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 275
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 275
83.xx Replace transfer
module 275
83.xx Transfer module life
warning 275
83.xx Transfer module
missing 275
83.xx Transfer module near life
warning 275
84 [color] photoconductor
low 238
84 [color] photoconductor nearly
low 238
84 Replace [color]
photoconductor 238
84.xx [Color] photoconductor
low 276
84.xx [color] photoconductor
missing 275
84.xx [color] photoconductor
nearly low 275
84.xx Replace [color]
photoconductor 276
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 278
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 278
88 Replace [color] cartridge 276
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically
low 276
88.xx [color] cartridge
low 276, 277
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 277
Adjusting color 262
an error has occurred with the
USB drive 262
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 263
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 262
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 263
Close front door 263
Close top access cover 263
Disk corrupted 263
Disk full, scan job canceled 263
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 264
Disk problem 264
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB 264
Fax memory full 264
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 264
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
administrator. 264
Fax Station Name not set up 264
Fax Station Number not set
up 265
Insert Tray [x] 265
Install Tray [x] 265
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 265
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] 265
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 266
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 266
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 267
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 267
No analog phone line connected
to modem, fax is disabled. 267
Paper changes needed 267
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 267
Index 338
Remove paper from standard
output bin 267
Replace separator pad 267
Restore held jobs? 267
Scan Document Too Long 268
Scanner ADF Cover Open 268
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 268
Some held jobs were not
restored 268
Supply needed to complete
job 268
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 268
Unsupported disk 268
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 268
printer options troubleshooting
2,000‑sheet drawer problems 296
cannot detect flash memory
card 296
cannot detect printer hard
disk 296
internal print server 297
Internal Solutions Port 297
memory card 296
option does not work 295
paper tray problems 295
USB/parallel interface card 297
printer problems, solving basic 262
printer security
information on 219
printhead lenses
cleaning 224
printing
black‑and‑white 81
canceling, from the printer control
panel 89
directory list 86
font sample list 86
forms 81
from a mobile device 83
from flash drive 83
from Macintosh 81
from Windows 81
Max Speed and Max Yield 82
menu settings page 55
network setup page 56
transparencies 87
printing a directory list 86
printing a document 81
printing a font sample list 86
printing a menu settings page 55
printing a network setup page 56
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 85
from Windows 85
printing forms 81
printing from a flash drive 83
printing from a mobile device 83
printing in black and white 81
publications
where to find 8
Q
Quality menu 199
Quiet Mode
print quality troubleshooting 299
Quiet mode 211
R
reattaching the system board
cover 24
recycled paper
using 76, 210
recycling 320
Lexmark packaging 214
Lexmark products 214
toner cartridges 214
reducing a copy 94
reducing noise 211
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 22
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 267
Remove paper from standard
output bin 267
removing printer hard disk 40
repeat print jobs 85
printing from a Macintosh
computer 85
printing from Windows 85
Replace separator pad 267
replacing
toner cartridges 229
replacing supplies
photoconductors 238
waster toner bottle 237
reports
viewing 243
Reports menu 140, 143
reserve print jobs 85
printing from a Macintosh
computer 85
printing from Windows 85
resetting the maintenance
counter 241
resolution, fax
changing 116
Restore held jobs? 267
restoring factory default
settings 213
S
safety information 6, 7
saving paper 96
Scan Document Too Long 268
scan image
output file type 124
scan options
Send As 124
scan screen
advanced options 129
options 128
scan to computer
options 128, 129
original size 128
paper orientation, setting 129
Scan to Network
setting up 21
using 122
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 286
partial document or photo
scans 286
scan was not successful 285
scanner unit does not close 282
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 285
ScanBack Utility
using 127
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) 12
scanner glass 12
Scanner ADF Cover Open 268
scanner glass
cleaning 221
scanner glass (flatbed)
copying using 91
scanning
from a flash drive 127
quick copy 90
Index 339
to a computer 126
to an FTP address 123
to an FTP, using address book 124
scanning to a computer 126
scanning to a flash drive 127
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 122
using shortcut numbers 123
using the address book 124
using the printer control
panel 123
scanning to network
destinations 122
Security Audit Log menu 157
security lock 215
security Web page
where to find 219
selecting a location for the
printer 9
selecting paper 75
Send As
e‑mail options 106
scan options 124
sending a fax 115
sending a fax using shortcuts 116
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 114
sending an e‑mail using the printer
control panel 103
sending fax
using shortcuts 116
using the address book 116
sending fax at a scheduled
time 117
sending fax using the address
book 116
separator pad
ordering 228
replacing 231
Serial [x] menu 150
serial printing
setting up 54
Set Date/Time menu 159
setting
TCP/IP address 144
setting the fax number or station
number 112
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 112
setting the paper size 57
setting the paper type 57
setting the Universal paper size 57
setting up e‑mail alerts using the
Embedded Web Server 243
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 287
setting up serial printing 54
Setup menu 195
shipping the printer 242
shortcuts, creating
e‑mail 102
fax destination 114
FTP address 123
FTP destination 122
showing icons on the home
screen 19
Sleep Mode
adjusting 212
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 268
SMTP Setup menu 153
Some held jobs were not
restored 268
Standard Network menu 141
standard tray
loading 57
Standard USB menu 147
statement of volatility 215
status of parts
checking 226
status of supplies
checking 226
storing
paper 77
supplies 229
storing print jobs 85
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 309
streaks appear on a page 308
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 104
Substitute Size menu 135
supplies
checking status 226
checking, from printer control
panel 226
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 226
conserving 210
storing 229
using genuine Lexmark 228
using recycled paper 210
Supplies menu 131
supplies, ordering
ADF pick assembly 228
ADF pick pad 228
fuser 227
photoconductors 228
separator pad 228
toner cartridges 227
transfer module 227
waste toner bottle 228
supplies, replacing
hotoconductors 238
waste toner bottle 237
Supply needed to complete job 268
supported file types 84
supported flash drives 84
supported paper sizes 78
system board
accessing 24
locking 215
system board cover
attaching 24
reattaching 24
T
TCP/IP menu 144
telecommunication
notices 323, 324, 325
tips
card stock 88
envelopes 87
labels, paper 88
letterhead 86
transparencies 87
toner cartridges
ordering 227
recycling 214
replacing 229
toner darkness
adjusting 82
toner fog or background shading
appears on the page 310
toner rubs off 311
toner specks 312
touch screen
buttons 17
transfer module
ordering 227
transparencies
copying on 91
loading 69
printing on 87
tips on using 87
Index 340
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 268
trays
linking 72, 73
unlinking 72, 73
troubleshooting
A network destination stopped
working or is invalid 292
an application error has
occurred 290
application icon is missing 293
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 315
checking an unresponsive
printer 262
checking an unresponsive
scanner 285
contacting customer support 315
error reading USB drive 294
FAQ about color printing 312
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 287
forgot My MFP password 294
Forms are not available or are not
working 291
nothing happens when USB drive
is inserted 294
printer cannot scan to selected
destination 293
Scan to Network 292
solving basic printer
problems 262
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 282
partial document or photo
copies 284
poor copy quality 282
poor scanned image quality 285
scanner unit does not close 282
troubleshooting, display
display is blank 278
display shows only diamonds 278
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 287
can receive but not send
faxes 289
can send but not receive
faxes 289
cannot send or receive a fax 287
received fax has poor print
quality 290
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 298
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 278
held jobs do not print 279
incorrect characters print 281
incorrect margins 300
jammed pages are not
reprinted 298
job prints from wrong tray 281
job prints on wrong paper 281
jobs do not print 278
Large jobs do not collate 281
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 278
paper curl 301
paper frequently jams 298
print job takes longer than
expected 280
printing slows down 280
tray linking does not work 281
unexpected page breaks
occur 282
troubleshooting, print quality
black streaks on a page 308
blank pages 305
characters have jagged edges 299
clipped images 299
fine horizontal lines 299
gray background 300
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
on prints 301
poor transparency quality 312
print irregularities 302
print is too dark 303
print is too light 303
repeating defects 305
shadow images appear on
prints 306
skewed print 307
solid color pages 308
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 309
streaked vertical lines on
prints 310
toner fog or background shading
on the page 310
toner rubs off 311
toner specks 312
white streaks on a page 308
troubleshooting, printer options
2,000‑sheet drawer problems 296
cannot detect flash memory
card 296
cannot detect printer hard
disk 296
internal print server 297
Internal Solutions Port 297
memory card 296
option does not work 295
paper tray problems 295
USB/parallel interface card 297
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 286
partial document or photo
scans 286
scan was not successful 285
scanner unit does not close 282
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 285
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 15
Universal Paper Size
setting 57
Universal paper size 139
Universal Setup menu 139
unlinking trays 72, 73
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 264
usb drive
error reading 294
nothing happens when
inserted 294
USB port 43
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 297
using Forms and Favorites 81
using Hibernate mode 212
using Max Speed and Max Yield 82
using shortcuts
sending fax 116
using the address book 103
sending fax 116
using the ScanBack Utility 127
using the touch‑screen buttons 17
Utilities menu 202
Index 341
V
verify print jobs 85
printing from a Macintosh
computer 85
printing from Windows 85
viewing
reports 243
viewing a fax log 117
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 243
volatile memory 215
erasing 216
volatility
statement of 215
W
waste toner bottle
ordering 228
replacing 237
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 268
wiping printer hard disk 217
Wireless menu 145
wireless network
configuration information 46
installation, using Macintosh 49
installation, using Windows 47
wireless network setup
in Windows 47
wireless printer setup
in Macintosh 49
WS‑Scan
about 22
X
XPS menu 203
Index 342